Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

beg in some manner

  • 1 beg

    1. I
    go begging нищенствовать, попрошайничать, побираться; make a living by begging зарабатывать на жизнь /жить/ попрошайничеством; he was too proud to beg гордость не позволяла ему просить милостыню
    2. II
    beg in some manner beg piteously (appealingly, impudently, from door to door, etc.) жалобным тоном и т. д. просить милостыню /подаяние/
    3. III
    beg smth. beg money (a few pence, a meal, food, etc.) просить /выпрашивать, клянчить/ деньги и т. д.; beg one's bread просить на кусок хлеба; beg a favour проекта /умолять/ об одолжении id I beg your pardon извините /простите/ [пожалуйста]; I beg your pardon? простоте [я не расслышал./, что вы сказали/]?; I beg your pardon! нет, уж, простите
    4. VII
    beg smb. to do smth. beg him to go (the guest to stay, her to help the children, the teacher to punish them, father to forgive her, etc.) просить /умолять, упрашивать/ его уйти и т. д; he urgently begged me not to tell them anything он настойчиво просил меня ничего им не говорить; may I beg you to shut the door? могу я попросить, вас закрыть зверь?
    5. XVI
    beg for smth. beg for water (for food, for money, for alms, for shelter, etc.) просить воды и т. д; beg for a living зарабатывать на жизнь попрошайничеством; beg for mercy (for one's life, for help, for forgiveness, for peace, etc.) умолять /молить/ о милосердии и т. д.
    6. XXI1
    || beg one's way to the city добираться до города, питаясь подаянием
    7. XXV
    beg that... book. beg that smth. may be done (that you will do it, that no one hears of it, etc.) умолять /молить/, чтобы что-л. было сделано и т. д.

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > beg

  • 2 seat

    1. III
    1) seat smb. the theatre (tile hall, the cinema, etc.) seats 300 (one thousand, very many people, etc.) театр и т.д. вмещает триста и т.д. человек, в театре и т.д. триста и т.д. мест; this table seats twelve за этим столом могут разместиться /сесть/ двенадцать человек
    2) seat smth. seat a chair чинить сиденье, поставить новое сиденье; seat an old pair of trousers /a pair of old breeches/ починить /поставить заплату на/ старые брюки
    3) || seat a candidate провести кандидата [в парламент]
    2. IV
    seat smb. in some manner seat smb. comfortably удобно усадить кого-л.; seat smb. somewhere seat smb. to the right of the hostess усадить кого-л. справа от хозяйки: where shall we seat the children? где мы посадим детей?
    3. XI
    1) be (keep, remain) seat ed ask /beg/ smb. to be seated попросить кого-л. /предложить кому-л./ сесть /присесть/; please be seated садитесь, пожалуйста; keep /remain/ seated не вставать (со стула), остаться [сидеть] на месте; we are all seated мы все сидим, у нас у всех есть места; may I be seated? можно мне сесть?, разрешите сесть?; be seated in some manner when you are comfortably seated, let us proceed когда вы все усядетесь, давайте начнем; be seated (up)on smth. be seated on the throne (on the back of a bull, upon a bale of wool, etc.) восседать на троне и т.д.; I found him seated on a reversed bucket я увидел его сидящим /, что он сидит/ на перевернутом ведре; be seated between smb. he was seated between us его посадили между нами
    2) be seated in some manner be well (fairly. ere.) seated быть хорошо и т.д. размещенным; the trouble is deeply seated эти неприятности имеют глубокие корни; the pain, he felt, was deeply seated ему казалось, что болит где-то глубоко внутри; his disease was unfortunately too deeply seated for recovery его болезнь была, к сожалению, очень запущена, и ее уже нельзя было вылечить; his influence is deeply seated in political circles он имеет сильное влияние в политических кругах; be seated for some time a family long seated here семья, давно живущая здесь /в этих краях/; be seated in some place a house seated in a pretty garden дом, расположенный /стоящий/ в красивом саду
    3) be seated for /to hold/ smb. the hall is seated for /to hold/ three thousand зал рассчитан на три тысячи человек; the carriage is seated for five карета вмещает /рассчитана на/ пять человек
    4. XVIII
    1) seat oneself somewhere seat oneself right in the middle of the first row (where they could, in a chair, on the bench, surely in the saddle, etc.) усесться /устроиться/ в самой середине первого ряда и т.д.; he seated himself at table он устроился за столом; seat o neself in some manner they seated themselves in state они торжественно уселись
    2) seat oneself somewhere the Turks seated themselves on the Bosphorus турки поселились /обосновались/ на Босфоре
    5. XXI1
    seat smb. on (in, etc.) smth. seat smb. on a chair (in an armchair, on the grass, etc.) посадить /усадить/ кого-л. на стул к т.д.; how many people can you seat in this room? сколько человек вы можете рассадить в этой комнате?; seat smb. in (according to) smth. seat the guests according to age (according to rank, according to position, in order, etc.) рассадить гостей по возрасту и т.д.

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > seat

  • 3 teach

    1. I
    my mother teaches моя мать /у меня мать/ преподает; where does he-? где он преподает?
    2. II
    teach in some manner teach well (competently, skilfully, badly, etc.) хорошо и т.д. учить /преподавать/
    3. III
    1) teach smb. teach a boy (children, students, adults, apprentices, a mixed class of boys and girls, etc.) учить /обучать/ мальчика и т.д.; teach school быть /работать/ учителем; teach smth. teach this subject (English, French, classics, social sciences, humanities, botany, grammar, music, the violin, the piano, riding, drawing, etc.) преподавать этот предмет и т.д., обучать этому предмету и т.д.; teach scientific classes (literary classes, etc.) вести занятия по естествознанию и т.д.
    2) teach smb. that will teach him это его научит /послужит ему уроком/
    4. IV
    teach smb. in some manner teach smb. well (competently, efficiently, poorly, etc.) хорошо и т.д. учить /обучать/ кого-л.; teach smth. in some manner teach English well (competently, badly, etc.) хорошо и т.д. преподавать английский язык /обучать английскому языку/
    5. V
    teach smb. smth.
    1) teach the children English (the students mathematics, them the elements of logic, her music, the girls singing, his son bridge, them a trade, etc.) учить /обучать/ детей английскому [языку] и т.д., преподавать детям английский язык и т.д.; who taught you French? кто учил вас французскому языку?; teach oneself smth. обучаться чему-л. самоучкой /самостоятельно/; I taught myself a little English я сам выучился немного английскому языку
    2) teach smb. a [good] lesson проучить кого-л.; this experience taught him a good lesson это был для него хороший урок, это послужило ему хорошим уроком; 1 will teach him a lesson in politeness я хочу проучить его, чтобы он был вежливым в следующий раз; he taught me a thing or two он меня кое-чему научил id you can't teach an old dog new tricks a старого воробья на мякине не проведешь
    6. VII
    teach smb. to do smth.
    1) teach the child to write (the girls to speak French, her children to play the piano, all her pupils to sing, the boy to swim under water, them to drive, etc.) учить /научить/ ребенка писать и т.д.; he taught me to cut flowers properly он научил меня правильно срезать цветы; teach the child to obey (the girl to behave properly, them to tell the truth, her never to tell a lie, the boy not to use the word, etc.) научать /приучить/ ребенка слушаться] и т.д.; misfortune has taught him to be thankful for small mercies несчастье научило его довольствоваться малым; they taught the dog to beg (to do tricks, to stand on hind legs, to give voice, etc.) они научили собаку просить и т.д., они так выдрессировали собаку, что она просит и т.д.
    2) this will teach you to speak the truth это научит тебя говорить правду; I will teach him (not) to meddle in my affairs я научу его не соваться /покажу ему, как соваться/ в мои дела
    7. XI
    be taught smth. he was taught English (piano, driving, etc.) его учили /обучали/ английскому и т.д.; what subjects are you taught at your college? какие предметы /дисциплины/ преподаются у вас /преподают вам/ в институте?; it is time the boy was taught something мальчика уже пора [начать] чему-нибудь обучать; be taught somewhere he was taught at home его учили /он учился/ дома /у домашних учителей/; he was taught in the bitterest of all schools, that of experience он прошел самую горькую школу teach школу жизни /жизненного опыта/; be taught that... they were taught that they must fight against evil их учили, что они должны бороться со злом
    8. XVI
    teach at /in /smth. teach at school (in a high school, in a secondary school, in a country school, in the eighth form /grade/, at an institute, at a college, at /in/ a university, etc.) преподавать /работать преподавателем/ в школе и т.д.; teach for smth. teach for a living зарабатывать себе на жизнь преподаванием; teach through smth. teach through practice обучать при немощи упражнений
    9. XXI1
    teach smth. to smb. teach this subject to the pupils (first aid to the girls, etc.) преподавать этот предмет ученикам и т.д., учить /обучать/ учеников этому предмету и т.д.; he taught this hobby to me он научил меня любить это занятие; teach smb. about smth. teach smb. about hygiene (about flying, etc.) (на)учить кого-л. гигиене и т.д.; he taught them about freedom он научил их любить свободу; you can't teach me anything about it в этом деле вам меня учить нечему; teach smth., smb. for smth. he teaches Greek for a living он зарабатывает на жизнь тем, что преподает греческий язык /преподаванием, уроками греческого языка/; she teaches little children for a small fee за небольшую плату она обучает детишек || teach smb. through practice обучать кого-л. на практике /при помощи упражнений/
    10. XXVI
    teach smb. that... teach smb. that it is wrong to answer back (that two sides of a triangle are greater than the third, etc.) объяснить кому-л., что огрызаться нельзя и т.д.; teach smb. how... teach smb. how to behave (how to do the work, how to stamp receipts, etc.) научить кого-л. как себя вести и т.д.

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > teach

  • 4 drive

    1. I
    1) learn [how] to drive научиться водить машину; who is going to drive кто поведет машину?, кто сядет за руль?
    2) shall we walk or drive? пойдем пешком или поедем?
    2. II
    drive in some manner drive well (tirelessly, recklessly, cautiously, slowly, quickly, etc.) хорошо и т.д. водить машину /ездить/; drive at some time drive at night ездить ночью;
    3. III
    1) drive smth. drive a taxi (a railway engine, a tractor, etc.) водить такси и т.д..; can you drive a truck (a car)? вы умеете править грузовиком (машиной) /водить грузовик (машину)/?
    2) drive smb. I never walk now he always drives me я теперь совсем пешком не хожу, он меня всюду возит [на машине]
    3) drive smb., smth. drive a horse (a pair, a donkey, etc.) ехать на лошади и т.д. или погонять лошадь и т.д..; drive a carriage and pair ездить в карете, запряженной парой лошадей
    4) drive smth. drive a pump (machinery, an engine, etc.) приводить в действие насос и т.д. || drive a bargain заключать сделку; he drives a hard bargain с ним трудно сговориться /сторговаться/
    4. IV
    drive smb. in some manner drive smb. hard загонять кого-л., перегрузить кого-л. работой
    5. VI
    drive smb. to some state drive smb. mad /insane, crazy, wild/ сводить кого-л. с ума
    6. VII
    drive smb. to do smth. drive smb. to leave (to resign, to beg, etc.) заставить /вынудить/ кого-л. уйти и т.д.
    7. XI
    1) be driven by smb. the car was driven by a woman за рулем сидела /машиной управляла, машину вела/ женщина
    2) be driven by smth. this machine is driven by steam эта машина работает при помощи пара /на паре/
    3) be driven to do smth. he was driven to steal он был вынужден воровать; be driven (in)to doing smth. he was driven (in)to stealing by hunger голод толкнул его на воровство
    8. XVI
    1) drive in smth. drive in a car (in a taxi, in a carriage, etc.) ездить в машине и т.д..; drive to (through, at, etc.) smth. drive to the station (through London, into the country. etc.) ехать на вокзал и т.д..; drive in the right direction ехать [на машине] в правильном направлении; drive at a great speed ехать /мчаться/ [на машине] с большой скоростью
    2) drive over smb., smth. drive over a dog (over a bird, over a ditch, etc.) переехать /задавить/ собаку и т.д.
    3) drive across (on, over, etc.) smth. the ship drove swiftly across (on) the waves корабль быстро несся по волнам: the clouds drove across the sky (over the city, etc.) тучи неслись по небу и т.д.
    4) drive on (in, etc.) smth. the ship drove on the rocks корабль наскочил на скалы; the rain (the wind) was driving in our faces дождь (ветер) бил /хлестал/ [нам] в лицо
    5) drive at smth. I don't know what you are driving at я не знаю, что вы этим хотите сказать /к чему вы клоните/
    9. XXI1
    1) drive smb. (in)to smth. drive smb. to the station (into the country, to the farm, etc.) (отвозить кого-л. на станцию и т.д..; my friend drove me to his house in his new car мой приятель отвез меня к себе домой на своей новой машине: drive some distance from smth. drive ten miles from the station проехать /отъехать/ десять миль от станции
    2) drive smb., smth. to (up, out of, etc.) smth. drive the cows to pasture (one's cattle to market) гнать коров на пастбище (скот на базар); drive a horse (a donkey) up the hill гнать лошадь (осла) в гору; drive the свешу out of the town (out of their positions) выбить противника из города (с занятых им позиций); drive the prisoners into the enclosure загонять пленных за ограду; drive dry leaves along the paths (sand down the beach, etc.) гнать сухие листья по дорожкам и т.д.., the wind was driving the rain against the window-panes был сильный ветер, и дождь хлестал по стеклам окон; the gale drove the ship on to the rocks буря гнала корабль на скалы || drive a good (bad) bargain with smb. заключить выгодную (невыгодную) сделку с кем-л. id drive smth. home to smb. доводить что-л. до чьего-л. сознания; drive the point (the fact, an argument, etc.) home to smb. довести какую-л. мысль и т.д. до чьего-л. сознания; drive smb. into a corner загнать кого-л. в угол, припереть кого-л. к стенке
    3) drive smth. through (into, etc.) smth. drive a tunnel through a mountain (a railway through a desert, a road through a hilly district, etc.) прокладывать тоннель в горах и т.д..; drive a nail into a wall (into а, board, into a plank, etc.) забить /загнать/ гвоздь в стену и т.д..; drive a knife into smb.'s back всадить нож кому-л. в спину; drive one's sword through smb.'s body вонзить саблю в кого-л.; drive one's fist through the window-pane разбить кулаком окно || drive smth. into smb.'s head вбивать что-л. кому-л. в голову
    4) drive smb. to smth. drive smb. to despair /to desperation/ доводить кого-л. до отчаяния; drive smb. to extreme measures вынудить кого-л. принять крайние меры; she drove him to angry words она его так разозлила, что он начал ругаться; drive smb. to suicide толкать кого-л. на самоубийство; you're driving me to my wits' end ума не приложу, что с тобой делать; drive smb. out of smth. drive smb. out of his senses сводить кого-л. с ума
    10. XXII
    drive smb. into doing smth. drive smb. into lying (into resigning, into going away, etc.) заставлять /вынуждать/ кого-л. лгать и т.д..; she drove him into leaving her она так себя вела, что он вынужден был уйти от нее

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > drive

  • 5 sit\ up

    1. I
    1) the child can sit up ребенок может /научиться/ садиться; the sudden pain made me sit up неожиданная острая боль заставила меня подскочить; she taught the dog to sit up and beg она научила собаку служить
    2) id I'll make him sit up a) я заставлю его проснуться, я расшевелю его; б) я сделаю так, что он обратит на меня внимание
    2. II
    1) sit up [till] some time sit up late долго не ложиться спать, засиживаться до поздней ночи; sit up all night (half the night, far into the night, etc.) не ложиться спать /сидеть/ всю ночь и т.д.; how late do you sit up at night? когда же вы ложитесь спать?
    2) sit up in some manner sit up straight сиди прямо [, не горбись]
    3. IV
    sit smb. up in some manner just sit me up a little приподнимите меня немного
    4. XIII
    sit up to do smth. sit up to study (to nurse one's father, etc.) не ложиться спать /поздно сидеть/, чтобы заниматься и т.д.
    5. XIV
    sit up doing smth. sit up talking засидеться допоздна за разговорами /за беседой/; they sat up all night playing cards они просидели всю ночь за картами
    6. XVI
    1) sit up in smth. sit up in bed сидеть /сесть/ в кровати; he suddenly sat up in the chair он неожиданно выпрямился на стуле
    2) sit up with smb., smth. sit up with a sick person (with a dead body, with a patient, etc.) просидеть всю ночь с больным /у постели больного/ и т.д.; sit up for smb. I shall be late getting back, so please don't sit up for me я вернусь поздно, не ждите меня, пожалуйста; she sat up for her husband она не ложилась спать до прихода мужа
    7. XXV
    1) sit up since... the baby has been sitting up since he was five months old ребенок начал садиться с пяти месяцев
    2) sit up when... we all sat up when holiday was announced мы все оживились /зашевелились/, когда объявили, что будут каникулы

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > sit\ up

  • 6 steal

    1. I
    it is wrong to steal воровать дурно /нельзя, грешно/; too proud to beg but not ashamed to steal слишком гордый, чтобы просить, но не стыдящийся красть
    2. II
    steal somewhere when it struck 12 he stole in когда пробило двенадцать, он крадучись /украдкой, тихо/ вошел; the night is stealing in незаметно надвигается ночь; somehow such thoughts always steal in почему-то всегда вкрадываются /лезут/ подобные /такие/ мысли; he stole out and hid он тайком выбрался наружу и спрятался; steal upstairs тайком /втихомолку/ пробраться наверх
    3. III
    steal smth. steal money (smb.'s purse, smb.'s jewelry, smb.'s suitcase, a handkerchief, fruit, etc.) (украсть деньги и т.д.; someone has stolen my watch кто-то украл у меня часы; I stole a few hours' sleep я урвал несколько часов, чтобы поспать; steal a kiss сорвать поцелуй; steal smb.'s heart похитить чье-л. сердце; steal smb.'s affections добиться чьей-л. привязанности; steal a glance украдкой взглянуть, украдкой бросить взгляд; steal а пар вздремнуть украдкой; steal a ride проехать зайцем id steal the show затмить всех
    4. IV
    steal smth. in some manner steal smth. shamelessly (cunningly, successfully, etc.) бесстыдно и т.д. (украсть что-л.
    5. XI
    be stolen my rings have been stolen у меня украли кольца; be stolen from smth., smb. my papers were stolen from my pocket у меня выкрали документы из кармана; your money was stolen from me у меня украли ваши деньги
    6. XVI
    steal to /towards/ smth. steal to the door (towards the window, towards the house, etc.) красться /подкрадываться/ к двери и т.д.; steal into smth. steal into a shelter (into a hole, into a house, into the room on tiptoe, etc.) красться /прокрадываться/ в убежище и т.д.; doubt stole into my heart мне в душу закралось сомнение; fear (terror, etc.) stole into her heart в ее душу проник /ее душу охватил/ страх и т.д.; steal out of smth. steal out of the room (out of the house, out of the hole, etc.) украдкой выбраться /выйти/ из комнаты и т.д., steal out of sight незаметно скрыться /исчезнуть/ из виду; steal across smth. steal across the room крадучись пересечь комнату; clouds stole across the face of the moon тучи постепенно закрывали /наползали на/ луну; steal over smth. a smile stole over his face улыбка тронула его лицо /мелькнула на его лице/; steal over smb. a vague apprehension (a lonely feeling, a strange drowsiness, a feeling of disgust, a sense of happiness, etc.) steals over me чувство беспокойства и т.д. постепенно овладевает мною /охватывает меня/; he felt sleep stealing over him он почувствовал, как им овладевает /как он погружается в/ сон; steal up (on) smb. disease was stealing upon him к нему подкрадывалась болезнь; winter has stolen (up)on us imperceptibly незаметно подкралась зима; steal down (up) smth. a tear stole down her cheek по ее щеке медленно скатилась слеза; а mist stole up the valley в долине поднимался туман, туман окутывал долину; steal through smth. the light steals through the chinks свет пробивается сквозь щели
    7. XXI1
    1) steal smth. from smb., smth. steal a watch from him (everything from us, some books from that shop, etc.) украсть /стащить/ часы у него и т.д.; steal smth. at smb., smth. steal a look /а glance/ at her (at the picture, etc.) украдкой бросить взгляд на нее и т.д.
    2) || steal a way into smb.'s heart влезть [незаметно] кому-л. в душу

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > steal

  • 7 μετά

    μετά (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. and acc., in the NT not (B-D-F §203; Rob. 610) w. dat.—For lit. s. ἀνά, beg.; also for μετά (and σύν) Tycho Mommsen, Beiträge zu d. Lehre v. den griech. Präp. 1895. Basic idea: ‘in the vicinity of ’.
    A. w. gen. with
    ① marker of placement, with, among, in company with someone (Gen 42:5; EpArist 180; En 22:13; 99:10; PsSol 4:6; JosAs 10:3 al.) or someth. ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων he was among the wild animals Mk 1:13 (Diog. L. 6, 92 μόσχοι μετὰ λύκων). ἦν συγκαθήμενος μ. τῶν ὑπηρετῶν he sat down among the servants 14:54. μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσθη he was classed among the criminals Mk 15:28; Lk 22:37. τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μ. τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει he will assign him his lot among the faithless (unbelievers?) Lk 12:46; cp. Mt 24:51. ζῆτειν τὸν ζῶντα μ. τῶν νεκρῶν seek the living among the dead Lk 24:5. μὴ γογγύζετε μετʼ ἀλλήλων do not grumble among yourselves J 6:43. εἱστήκει Ἰούδας μετʼ αὐτῶν 18:5. ἡ σκηνὴ τ. θεοῦ μετὰ τ. ἀνθρώπων Rv 21:3a. μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν in the midst of the clouds 1:7.
    ② marker of assoc. in gener. sense denoting the company within which someth. takes place, with
    ⓐ w. gen. of pers. in company w. whom someth. takes place
    α. w. verbs of going, remaining, etc. προσέρχεσθαι μ. τινος come (in company) with someone Mt 20:20; cp. 5:41; Mk 1:29; 3:7; 5:24, 37; 11:11; 14:17; Lk 2:51; 6:17; 9:49; 14:31; J 3:22b; 11:54; Ac 24:1; Gal 2:1. Angels accompanying the Messiah Mt 25:31; cp. 16:27; Mk 8:38; 1 Th 3:13; 2 Th 1:7. περιπατεῖν μ. τινος (Menand., Fgm. 178 Kö., Sam. 587f S. [242f Kö.]; ApcEsdr 6:12) J 6:66. γίνεσθαι μ. τινος be, remain with someone Ac 7:38; 9:19; 20:18; AcPlCor 2:4 (ApcMos 2 ἐγένοντο μ. ἀλλήλων). οἱ μ. αὐτοῦ γενόμενοι his companions Mk 16:10. μένειν μ. τινος stay with someone 1J 2:19 (ParJer 3:15). ζήσασα μ. ἀνδρός Lk 2:36. ἀκολουθεῖν μ. τινος follow (after) someone Rv 6:8; 14:13 (s. ἀκολουθέω 2).
    β. used w. trans. verbs ἄγειν τινὰ μ. ἑαυτοῦ bring someone along (s. ἄγω 1b) 2 Ti 4:11. παραλαμβάνειν τινὰ μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ take or bring someone along (as a companion) (Gen 22:3) Mt 12:45; 18:16; Mk 14:33. ἔχειν τι μ. ἑαυτοῦ have someth. with oneself: bread 8:14; τινά someone (PGM 4, 1952): the lame Mt 15:30; the poor Mk 14:7; Mt 26:11; J 12:8; the bridegroom Mk 2:19b. Pass. συγκατεψηφίσθη μετὰ τ. ἕνδεκα ἀποστόλων he was chosen (to serve) with the eleven apostles Ac 1:26 (cp. Himerius, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 3 μετὰ τῶν θεῶν ἀριθμούμενος=numbered with the gods).
    γ. esp. εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, in someone’s company.
    א. lit. of close association: the disciples w. Jesus Mt 26:69, 71; Mk 3:14; 14:67; Lk 22:59; J 15:27; 17:24. Also of accompaniment for a short time Mt 5:25; J 3:26; 9:40; 12:17; 20:24, 26. Of Jesus’ association w. his disciples 13:33; 14:9; 16:4; 17:12. Of relations between the superintendent and the congregation μετὰ τ. ἐπισκόπου εἶναι be with, on the side of, the supervisor/bishop IPhld 3:2. οἱ μ. τινος (sc. ὄντες) someone’s friends, companions, etc. (Diod S 17, 96, 2 οἱ μεθʼ Ἡρακλέους; SIG 175, 5; 659, 5; 826e II, 30; Am 4:2; 8:10; Gen 24:59; 1 Macc 7:23; JosAs 27:7; AscIs 2:15; 3:6, 14; Jos., Vi. 397, Ant. 7, 20; Just., D. 8, 3 al.) Mt 12:3f; 26:51; Mk 1:36; 2:25; Lk 6:3f. Of things ἄλλα πλοῖα ἦν μ. αὐτοῦ other boats were with him, accompanied him Mk 4:36. ὁ μισθός μου μετʼ ἐμοῦ (sc. ἐστιν) Rv 22:12. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ the fire (of judgment) awaits him (the interpretation of the Armenian text; sim. the Lat.) AcPlCor 2:37.
    ב. in ref. to supportiveness be with someone, stand by, help someone of God’s help (Gen 21:20; 26:3; 28:20 al.; Jos., Ant. 15, 138) J 3:2; 8:29; 16:32; Ac 7:9 (cp. Gen 39:2, 21); 10:38; cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 8:8); Lk 1:28; Ro 15:33. Of God’s hand (1 Ch 4:10) Lk 1:66; Ac 11:21. Of Christ: Mt 28:20; Ac 18:10.
    ג. a favorite expr. in conclusions of letters ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης ἔσται μ. ὑμῶν will be with you 2 Cor 13:11; cp. Phil 4:9; ὁ κύριος κτλ. 2 Th 3:16 (cp. Ruth 2:4); 2 Ti 4:22. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰησοῦ μ. ὑμῶν (sc. ἔσται) 1 Cor 16:23; cp. 1 Th 5:28; 1 Cl 65:2. μ. τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25; 21:9. μ. πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Th 3:18; cp. Eph 6:24. Short and to the point: ἡ χάρις μ. ὑμῶν Col 4:18; 1 Ti 6:21; cp. Tit 3:15; Hb 13:25. ἔσται μεθʼ ἡμῶν χάρις ἔλεος εἰρήνη 2J 3.—ἡ ἀγάπη μου μ. πάντων ὑμῶν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ my love is with you all in Christ Jesus 1 Cor 16:24. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τ. θεοῦ καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 2 Cor 13:13 (WvanUnnik, Dominus Vobiscum: liturg. formula, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 270–305; on the Trinitarian formula s. the lit. on πνεῦμα 8).—In the expr. ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς μ. αὐτῶν Ac 14:27; 15:4 (cp. Hs 5, 1, 1) ὤν could be supplied what God has done in helping them; but ποιεῖν can just as well go w. μ. αὐτῶν has done for them, after the analogy of עָשָׂה עִם פּ׳ (Tob 12:6; 13:7 ἃ ποιήσει μεθʼ ὑμῶν; Jdth 8:26 ὅσα ἐποίησεν μετὰ Ἀβραάμ; 15:10; 1 Macc 10:27. In addition, cp. BGU 798, 8 εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῇ ἡμῶν δεσποίνῃ εἰς πάντα τὰ καλὰ ἃ ἐποίησεν μετὰ τ. δούλων αὐτῆς. But s. also LMaloney, ‘All That God Had Done with Them’ ’91, 118–21: God works ‘with’ the apostles and ‘through’ them). Here also belongs ποιεῖν ἔλεος μ. τινος have mercy on someone, show mercy to someone (Gen 24:12; 2 Km 3:8; JosAs 23:4) Lk 1:72; 10:37 (MWilcox, The Semitisms in Ac, ’65, 84f). ἐμεγάλυνεν κύριος τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετʼ αὐτῆς the Lord has shown great mercy to her 1:58 (cp. 1 Km 12:24; Ps 125:2f).—In πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μ. τοῦ προσώπου σου Ac 2:28=Ps 15:11 the LXX has literally translated אֶת־פָּנֶיךָ; it means in your presence.
    ד. in ref. to taking sides or being allied in some way with someone: in contrast to εἶναι κατά τινος be against someone is εἶναι μ. τινος be with someone, on someone’s side Mt 12:30a; Lk 11:23a (AFridrichsen, ZNW 13, 1912, 273–80).
    ⓑ to denote the company in which an activity or experience takes place: ἀνακεῖσθαι μ. τινος recline at table with someone (for a meal) Mt 26:20. ἀνακλιθῆναι 8:11; cp. Lk 24:30. βασιλεύειν Rv 20:4, 6. γρηγορεῖν Mt 26:38, 40. δειπνεῖν Rv 3:20 (TestJob 15:2). δουλεύειν Gal 4:25. ἐμπαίζειν Mt 27:41. ἐσθίειν 9:11; 24:49; Mk 2:16ab; 14:14, 18; Lk 5:30 (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 9 [Stone p. 10]). ἠρώτα … ἵνα φάγῃ μ. αὐτοῦ he asked (him) to eat with him 7:36 (cp. TestAbr B 6 p. 110, 21 [Stone p. 68]; JosAs 7:1). εὐφραίνεσθαι 15:29; Ro 15:10 (Dt 32:43). κλαίειν 12:15b. κληρονομεῖν Gal 4:30 (Gen 21:10; Just., D. 26, 1; cp. συγκληρονομεῖν JosAs 24:9). πίνειν Mt 26:29. ποιεῖν τὸ πάσχα celebrate the Passover (with someone) 26:18. συνάγειν 12:30b; Lk 11:23b. συνεσθίειν Gal 2:12. ταράττεσθαι Mt 2:3. τρώγειν J 13:1 v.l. χαίρειν Ro 12:15a.
    ⓒ The associative aspect can also derive expression from the fact that two opposite parties exert influence upon one another or that one party brings the other to adopt a corresponding, and therefore common, attitude
    α. in friendly, or at least not in hostile, fashion: εἰρηνεύειν (3 Km 22:45) Ro 12:18; cp. 2 Ti 2:22; Hb 12:14. εὐθηνίαν ἔχειν Hm 2:3. κοινωνίαν ἔχειν 1J 1:3a, 7. λαλεῖν μετά τινος (cp. Gen 31:24, 29; 1 Macc 7:15) Mk 6:50; J 4:27ab. συλλαλεῖν μ. τινος Mt 17:3; Ac 25:12. συμβούλιον διδόναι Mk 3:6. συνάγεσθαι Mt 28:12; J 18:2. συνᾶραι λόγον Mt 18:23; 25:19. ἐγένοντο φίλοι ὅ τε. Ἡρῴδης καὶ ὁ Πιλᾶτος μετʼ ἀλλήλων Lk 23:12. οἱ μοιχεύοντες μετʼ αὐτῆς those who commit adultery with her Rv 2:22. πορνεύειν (cp. Ezk 16:34; TestAbr A 10 p. 88, 7 [Stone p. 24]) 17:2; 18:3, 9. μολύνεσθαι 14:4 (cp. En 12:4 τῶν γυναικῶν ἐμιάνθησαν).
    β. in hostile fashion; after verbs of fighting, quarreling, etc. to denote the pers. w. whom the strife is being carried on πολεμεῖν μ. τινος carry on war with = against someone (נִלְחַם עִם פּ׳ 1 Km 17:33; 3 Km 12:24; ParJer 7:10. But s. also OGI 201, 3 ἐπολέμησα μετὰ τῶν Βλεμύων; BGU 1035, 9; 11. Also in Mod. Gk. [AThumb, Hdb. der neugriech. Volkssprache2 1910 §162, 1 note]) Rv 2:16; 12:7; 13:4; 17:14 (B-D-F §193, 4; Rob. 610). Also πόλεμον ποιεῖν (Gen 14:2; 1 Ch 5:19) 11:7; 12:17; 13:7 (Da 7:21 Theod.); 19:19. ζητεῖν μ. τινος deliberate or dispute w. someone J 16:19; cp. 3:25 (cp. ApcEsdr 2:6 δικάζου μεθʼ ἡμῶν). κρίνεσθαι go to law w. someone 1 Cor 6:6. κρίματα ἔχειν μ. τινος have lawsuits w. someone vs. 7.
    ⓓ of any other relation betw. persons, whether already existing or brought about in some manner εἶδον τὸ παιδίον μ. Μαρίας Mt 2:11. ἀνταποδοῦναι ὑμῖν ἄνεσιν μ. ἡμῶν 2 Th 1:7. ἐκδέχομαι αὐτὸν μ. τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Cor 16:11. Of delegations, composed of several units Mt 22:16; 2 Cor 8:18. συμφωνεῖν Mt 20:2.
    ⓔ of things ὧν τὸ αἷμα ἔμιξεν μ. τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν Lk 13:1. Pass. πιεῖν οἶνον μ. χολῆς μεμιγμένον Mt 27:34.
    ⓕ to show a close connection betw. two nouns, upon the first of which the main emphasis lies (Thu. 7, 75, 3 λύπη μ. φόβου; Pla., Rep. 9, 591b ἰσχύν τε καὶ κάλλος μετὰ ὑγιείας λαμβάνειν; Ar. 11:2 τόξον ἔχειν μ. φαρέτρας) ἀγάπη μ. πίστεως Eph 6:23. πίστις μ. σωφροσύνης 1 Ti 2:15. εὐσέβεια μ. αὐταρκείας 6:6. Cp. Eph 4:2b; Col 1:11; 1 Ti 1:14. φάρμακον μ. οἰνομέλιτος ITr 6:2.
    ③ marker of attendant circumstances of someth. that takes place, with
    ⓐ of moods, emotions, wishes, feelings, excitement, states of mind or body (Xenophon Eph. 1, 15, 5 μ. ἀδείας; 2, 10, 4 μ. ἐπιμελείας; PAmh II, 133, 11 μετὰ πολλῶν κόπων; PLond II, 358, 8 p. 172 [II A.D.]; SIG index IV p. 445f; LXX [Johannessohn, Präp. 209ff]; En et al.) μ. αἰδοῦς with modesty 1 Ti 2:9. μ. αἰσχύνης with shame (s. αἰσχύνη 2) Lk 14:9. μ. εὐνοίας Eph 6:7. μ. εὐχαριστίας Phil 4:6; 1 Ti 4:3f; cp. Ac 24:3. μετὰ χαρᾶς (2 Macc 15:28; 3 Macc 5:21; 6:34; En 10:16; PsSol 8:16 al.; s. χαρά 1a) 1 Th 1:6; Hb 10:34; 13:17; cp. Phil 2:29. μ. φόβου καὶ τρόμου 2 Cor 7:15; Eph 6:5; Phil 2:12. μ. φόβου καὶ χαρᾶς Mt 28:8. μ. πραΰτητος καὶ φόβου 1 Pt 3:16. μ. παρρησίας (Lev 26:13; 1 Macc 4:18; s. παρρησία 3a) Ac 2:29; 4:29, 31; 28:31; Hb 4:16. μ. πεποιθήσεως 1 Cl 31:3. μ. σπουδῆς (3 Macc 5:24, 27; Mel., P. 12, 80) Mk 6:25; Lk 1:39. μ. ταπεινοφροσύνης Eph 4:2a; cp. Ac 20:19. μ. ὀργῆς (3 Macc 6:23; TestJob 4:4) Mk 3:5. μ. δακρύων in tears (3 Macc 1:16; 4:2; 5:7; TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 19 [Stone p. 20]; 14 p. 94, 21 [St. p. 36]; JosAs 28:8; ApcEsdr 6:23; s. δάκρυον) Mk 9:24 v.l.; Hb 5:7; 12:17. μ. εἰρήνης (s. εἰρήνη 1b) Ac 15:33; Hb 11:31.
    ⓑ of other accompanying phenomena (Antig. Car. 148 μετὰ φλογὸς καίεσθαι) μ. διωγμῶν though with persecutions Mk 10:30. μ. ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν 1 Ti 4:14. μ. νηστειῶν Ac 14:23. μ. θορύβου (Jos., Ant. 5, 216) 24:18. μ. παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 8:4. μ. παρατηρήσεως Lk 17:20. μ. ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας Ac 27:10 (s. ὕβρις 3). μ. φαντασίας 25:23. μ. δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης Mt 24:30; Mk 13:26; Lk 21:27 (Just., A I, 50, 1 al. μ. δόξης, D. 132, 1 w. δυνάμεως). μ. ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς Ac 26:12 (Jos., Ant. 20, 180 μετʼ ἐξουσίας). μ. βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ ἐξάγειν τινά (s. βραχίων) Ac 13:17. μ. φωνῆς μεγάλης w. a loud voice Lk 17:15 (cp. EpArist 235; 281; JosAs 28:9). μ. σάλπιγγος with a trumpet call Mt 24:31 (Plut., Mor. 1135f μετʼ αὐλῶν=with the sound of flutes). σφραγίσαντες τ. λίθον μετὰ τ. κουστωδίας makes the stationing of the guard an accompaniment to the sealing of the stone Mt 27:66 (another possibility here is the instrumental use of μετά [Lycurgus the orator 124 μ. παραδειγμάτων διδάσκειν; SEG VIII, 246, 8 μετὰ κυνῶν—an instrument of torture—βασανίσαι; CWessely, Neue griech. Zauberpap. 1893, 234 γράφε μ. μέλανος; 2 Macc 6:16]: secure the stone by means of a guard; s. σφραγίζω 1).
    ⓒ of concrete objects, which serve as equipment (Appian, Maced. 9 §4 μετὰ χρυσῶν στεφάνων; POxy 123, 15; 19 μετὰ τῶν χλαμύδων εἰσβῆναι; 1 Esdr 5:57; Jdth 15:13; TestJob 24:10 μ. ψαλίδος; JosAs 7:4 μ. χρυσίου καὶ ἀργύριου; ParJer 9:31 μ. πολλῶν λίθων; ApcSed 7:10 μ. χαλιναρίου; ApcMos 40 μ. τῶν σινδόνων) μ. μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων Mt 26:47; 55; Mk 14:43, 48; Lk 22:52. μ. φανῶν καὶ λαμπάδων καὶ ὅπλων (Xenophon Eph. p. 336, 20 μ. λαμπάδων) J 18:3.
    B. w. acc. In our lit. only in the mng. after, behind
    ① marker of position that is behind someth., behind (Hom.+; Polyb.; Just., A I, 13, 4; Tat. 2, 2; not LXX) μ. τὸ δεύτερον καταπέτασμα behind the second curtain Hb 9:3.
    ② marker of time after another point of time, after (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX)
    ⓐ with the time expressly given μ. πολὺν χρόνον (2 Macc 6:1.—μετʼ οὐ πολὺν χρ.: Hero Alex. I p. 340, 6; SIG 1169, 54; Jos., Vi. 407) Mt 25:19. μ. τοσοῦτον χρόνον (4 Macc 5:7; ParJer 5:18) Hb 4:7. μ. χρόνον τινά (Diod S 9, 10, 2; Witkowski 26, 9 [III B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 8, 398; cp. En 106:1 μ. δὲ χρόνον; ApcSed 13:3 μ. χρόνον) Hv 1, 1, 2f; Hs 5, 2, 5; 9, 13, 8. μ. ἡμέρας ἕξ after six days Mt 17:1; Mk 9:2 (ApcMos 42 μ. τὰς ἓξ ἡμέρας). μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας (Artem. 4, 33 p. 224, 5; Polyaenus 6, 53; 8, 62; EpArist 301; TestJob 52:1f; 53:7; ParJer 9:14; Jos., Ant 7, 280) Mt 27:63; Mk 8:31; 10:34; Lk 2:46; cp. μ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας AcPlCor 2:30. μ. δύο ἡμέρας Mt 26:2; Mk 14:1 (cp. Caesar, Bell. Gall. 4, 9, 1 post tertiam diem=on the third day). μ. τινας ἡμέρας Ac 15:36; 24:24. μετʼ οὐ πολλὰς ἡμέρας (Artem. 1, 78 p. 72, 30; Jos., Ant. 5, 328, Vi. 309) Lk 15:13. οὐ μ. πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας not long after these days = within a few days Ac 1:5 (B-D-F §226; 433, 3; Rob. 612; 1158; Dssm., ZVS 45, 1913, 60). W. gen. foll. μ. ἡμέρας εἴκοσι τῆς προτέρας ὁράσεως twenty days after the former vision Hv 4, 1, 1 (cp. Biogr. p. 31 μετὰ ξ´ ἔτη τοῦ Ἰλιακοῦ πολέμου; Gen 16:3). μ. τρεῖς μῆνας Ac 28:11. μ. τρία ἔτη Gal 1:18. ὁ μ. τετρακόσια καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη γεγονὼς νόμος 3:17.
    ⓑ w. designations that are general, but include the idea of time: μ. τὴν ἄφιξίν μου Ac 20:29. μ. τὸ πάσχα after the Passover 12:4. μ. τὴν μετοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος Mt 1:12.
    ⓒ gener. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν after the (time of) tribulation Mk 13:24; cp. μ. τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων Mt 24:29. μ. τὴν ἔγερσιν 27:53. μ. τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν Ac 13:15. μ. τὸ βάπτισμα 10:37. μ. μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν Tit 3:10. μ. τὸ ψωμίον after he had eaten the piece of bread J 13:27.—Quite gener. μ. τοῦτο after this, afterward (Lucian, Hermot. 31; Gen 18:5; Lev 14:19; EpArist 258; TestJob 11:4; TestReub 1:9; TestLevi 6:3; Just., D. 57, 4) J 2:12; 11:7, 11; 19:28; Hb 9:27; Rv 7:1. μ. ταῦτα after this (Aeneas Tact. 240; 350; Diod S 1, 7, 1; Ex 3:20; 11:8 and oft.; TestJob 21:4; TestLevi 6:5; TestJos 19:5; JosAs 10:15; ParJer 3:10; ApcEsdr 4:36; ApcMos 2; Just., A I, 32, 6) Mk 16:12; Lk 5:27; 10:1 and oft. μ. οὐ πολύ (Dio Chrys. 56 [73], 8; Lucian, Scyth. 1; Herodian 1, 9, 7; BGU 614, 14; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 96 II, 9; 1 Esdr 3:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 132) not long afterward Ac 27:14. μ. μικρόν a short while afterward Mt 26:73; Mk 14:70 (Just., D. 56, 17). Also μ. βραχύ Lk 22:58 (cp. μετʼ ὀλίγον: Lucian, Dial, Mort. 15, 3; PRyl 77, 41; Wsd 15:8; Jdth 13:9; TestAbrA 7 p. 84, 8 [Stone p. 16]; GrBar 9:3; Jos., Ant. 12, 136; 10:15; Just., D. 56, 18).
    ⓓ w. subst. aor. inf. foll.
    α. w. acc. (SIG 633, 105; 640, 13; 695, 78; 1233, 1; Sir 46:20; Jdth 16:25; Bar 1:9; 1 Macc 1:1, 9; TestAbr B 12 p. 116, 11 [Stone p. 80]; 117, 5 [St. p. 82]; TestJob 5:2; TestLevi 18:1; ApcMos 1; Just., A I, 50, 12.—B-D-F §406, 3; Rob. 979) μ. τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με after I am raised up Mt 26:32; Mk 14:28. μ. τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην after John was arrested Mk 1:14.—Ac 1:3; 7:4; 10:41; 15:13; 19:21; 20:1; Hv 2, 1, 3; m 4, 1, 7; Hs 8, 1, 3; 8, 2, 5.
    β. without acc. (Aelian, VH 12, 1 p. 118, 27; Herodian 2, 9, 5; SIG 976, 39; UPZ 110, 193 [164 B.C.]; Sir 23:20; 32:18 v.l.; 1 Macc 1:20; ApcMos 26:42f; Just., A I, 14, 1; Tat. 16, 1) μ. τὸ λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς after he had spoken to them Mk 16:19.—Lk 12:5; 1 Cor 11:25; Hb 10:26.—W. perf. inf. 10:15.—M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μετά

  • 8 mistake

    1. III
    mistake smb., smth. mistake a man ошибаться в человеке; I have mistaken him я в нем обманулась; I don't want you to mistake me я не хочу, чтобы вы меня неправильно поняли; he could not possibly have mistaken my meaning он никак не мог понять меня неправильно; we must have mistaken the path мы, должно быть, ошиблись тропинкой; there was no mistakeing the seriousness of his tone в серьезности его тона нельзя было усомниться
    2. IV
    mistake smb., smth. in some manner mistake smb., smth. surprisingly (absolutely, carelessly, stupidly, etc.) удивительным образом и т.д. ошибаться в ком-л., в чем-л.
    3. XXI1
    mistake smb., smth. for smb., smth. mistake you for your brother (one person for another, James for John, this umbrella for his own, license for liberty, etc.) ошибочно принимать вас за вашего брата и т.д., I beg your pardon, I mistook you for a friend простите, пожалуйста, я принял вас за одного своего друга

    English-Russian dictionary of verb phrases > mistake

  • 9 wie

    I Adv.
    1. bes. in Fragen: how?; nach der Art etc.: what... like?; wie bitte? pardon?, (sorry,) what did you say?; entrüstet: I beg your pardon!; wie? umg., nachfragend, erstaunt: what?; wie, hat er das wirklich gesagt? what, did he really say that?; wie das? how come? umg.; wie alt sind Sie? how old are you?; wie lange ist das her? how long ago is ( oder was) that?; wie viel / viele how much / many; wie viel Uhr ist es? what’s the time?, what time is it?; wie viel ist zwei plus zwei? what is two plus two?, what do two and two make?; wie war’s im Kino? how was the film (Am. movie)?; wie ist er (so)? what’s he like?; wie ist der neue Wagen? what’s the new car like?; wie war das mit dem Unfall? what exactly happened in the accident?; ich weiß nicht, wie das kam I don’t know how it came about; na, wie war das / ich? so how was it / I?; wie wäre es mit...? how about...?; na, wie wär’s ( mit uns beiden)? so, how about it?
    2. umg., als Zusatz: das war doch sehr witzig, wie? that was very funny, wasn’t it?; du magst mich nicht, wie? you don’t like me, do you?
    3. im Ausruf: wie schön! how beautiful!; wie froh war ich! how glad I was; wie gut, dass...! lucky for me ( oder you etc.) that...; wie du das nur immer schaffst! amazing how you always manage it!; wie du wieder aussiehst! just look at you!; und wie! umg. and how!, you bet!
    4. vergleichend: die Art, wie du lachst the way (that) you laugh; die Art, wie es gemacht wird the way (that) it’s done; in dem oder im gleichen Maß, wie... to the same extent that...; ein Erlebnis, wie man es nur selten hat an experience of a kind that one has only rarely
    5. verallgemeinernd: wie lang etc. auch ( immer) however long etc., no matter how long etc.; wie laut sie auch schrie however loud she shouted; wie sehr ich mich auch bemühte however hard I tried, try as I would; wie dem auch sei be that as it may; wie sie auch heißen mögen whatever they’re called
    II Konj.
    1. in Vergleichen: (so) wie nach Adj. oder Adv.: as, meist as... as; nach Subst. oder V.: like; ein Mann wie er a man like him; in einem Fall wie diesem in a case like this; groß wie ein Haus (as) big as a house; ( nicht) so alt wie (not) as old as; so schön wie ( noch) nie more beautiful than ever; ich fühlte mich wie betäubt / unter Drogen I felt as if I’d been stunned / as if I’d been taking drugs; er singt wie selten einer / wie keiner very few people sing / nobody sings like ( oder as well as) he does; sie arbeitet wie verrückt oder eine Verrückte she works like a madwoman; er sieht nicht wie 50 aus he doesn’t look fifty; mit P wie Paula with a P as in Peter; sie machte es wie ihr Vater she did like her father
    2. (beispielsweise) such as, like; Haustiere wie Hunde, Katzen und Vögel pets such as dogs, cats, and cagebirds
    3. (und) as well as; auf dem Land wie in den kleinen Städten both in the country and in the small towns; Sommer wie Winter summer and winter; Arm wie Reich rich and poor
    4. mit Verben der Wahrnehmung: ich sah, wie er weglief I saw him running away; ich hörte, wie er es sagte I heard him say so ( oder it)
    5. mit Teilsatz: wie man mir gesagt hat as I’ve been told; sie ist reich, wie es scheint she’s rich (so) it appears; wie so oft as is often the case; (früher) as ( oder like) so often before; wie er nun mal ist being the type of person he is; dumm wie er ist stupid as he is; wie gehabt umg. as before; wie gesagt as I said ( oder was saying); wie du mir, so ich dir Sprichw. it’s tit for tat
    6. zeitlich: as, when; wie er dies hörte when he heard this; wie ich so vorbeiging just as I was passing
    7. umg. (als), nach Komp.: than; schneller wie du faster than you; anders wie gestern different from yesterday; wie wenn as when; nichts wie nothing but; nichts wie weg hier! let’s get out of here
    * * *
    das Wie
    how
    * * *
    [viː]
    nt -s, no pl

    das Wíé spielt dabei keine Rolle — how (it'll happen/it'll be done etc) is unimportant

    dass es geschehen muss, ist klar, nur das Wíé ist noch ein Problem — it's clear that it has to happen, the only problem is how

    das Wíé und Wann werden wir später besprechen — we'll talk about how and when later

    * * *
    1) (used to introduce a statement of what the speaker knows or believes to be the case: As you know, I'll be leaving tomorrow.) as
    2) (like: He was dressed as a woman.) as
    3) (with certain verbs eg regard, treat, describe, accept: I am regarded by some people as a bit of a fool; He treats the children as adults.) as
    4) ((also how ever) in what way; by what means: However did you get here?; However did you do that?) however
    5) (in what way: How do you make bread?) how
    6) (to what extent: How do you like my new hat?; How far is Paris from London?) how
    7) (by what means: I've no idea how he came here.) how
    8) (in what condition: How are you today?; How do I look?) how
    9) (for what reason: How is it that I am the last to know about this?) how
    10) (the same or similar: They're as like as two peas.) like
    11) (the same as or similar to; in the same or a similar way as: He climbs like a cat; She is like her mother.) like
    * * *
    <-s>
    [vi:]
    der Plan ist grundsätzlich klar, nur das \Wie muss noch festgelegt werden the plan is basically clear, we just have to establish how to implement it
    * * *
    1.
    1) (auf welche Art u. Weise) how

    wie heißt er/das? — what is his/its name?; what is he/that called?

    wie [bitte]? — [I beg your] pardon?; (entrüstet) I beg your pardon!

    wie war das? — (ugs.) what was that?; what did you say?

    wie kommt es, dass...? — how is it that...?

    wie das? — (ugs.) how did that come about?

    wie war das Wetter? — what was the weather like?; how was the weather?

    wie ist dein neuer Chef? — what is your new boss like? (coll.); how is your new boss? (coll.)

    wie war es in Spanien? — what was Spain like?; what was it like in Spain?

    wie wär's mit... — how about...

    wie lange/groß/hoch/oft/viel? — how long/big/high/often/much?

    und wie! — and how! (coll.)

    4) (ugs.): (nicht wahr)

    das hat dir Spaß gemacht, wie? — you enjoyed that, didn't you?

    2.

    [die Art,] wie er es tut — the way or manner in which he does it

    3.

    [so]... wie... — as... as...

    er macht es [genauso] wie du — he does it [just] like you [do]

    ich fühlte mich wie... — I felt as if I were...

    ‘N’ wie ‘Nordpol’ — N for November

    wie [zum Beispiel] — like; such as

    wie wenn — as if or though

    2) (und, sowie) as well as; both

    Männer wie Frauen — men as well as women; both men and women

    3) (temporal): (als)

    wie ich an seinem Fenster vorbeigehe, höre ich ihn singen — as I pass by his window I hear him singing

    4) (ugs.): (außer)
    * * *
    A. adv
    1. besonders in Fragen: how?; nach der Art etc: what … like?;
    wie bitte? pardon?, (sorry,) what did you say?; entrüstet: I beg your pardon!;
    wie? umg, nachfragend, erstaunt: what?;
    wie, hat er das wirklich gesagt? what, did he really say that?;
    wie das? how come? umg;
    wie alt sind Sie? how old are you?;
    wie lange ist das her? how long ago is ( oder was) that?;
    wie viel/viele how much/many;
    wie viel Uhr ist es? what’s the time?, what time is it?;
    wie viel ist zwei plus zwei? what is two plus two?, what do two and two make?;
    wie war’s im Kino? how was the film (US movie)?;
    wie ist er (so)? what’s he like?;
    wie ist der neue Wagen? what’s the new car like?;
    wie war das mit dem Unfall? what exactly happened in the accident?;
    ich weiß nicht, wie das kam I don’t know how it came about;
    na, wie war das/ich? so how was it/I?;
    wie wäre es mit …? how about …?;
    na, wie wär’s (mit uns beiden)? so, how about it?
    2. umg, als Zusatz:
    das war doch sehr witzig, wie? that was very funny, wasn’t it?;
    du magst mich nicht, wie? you don’t like me, do you?
    wie schön! how beautiful!;
    wie froh war ich! how glad I was;
    wie gut, dass …! lucky for me ( oder you etc) that …;
    wie du das nur immer schaffst! amazing how you always manage it!;
    wie du wieder aussiehst! just look at you!;
    und wie! umg and how!, you bet!
    die Art, wie du lachst the way (that) you laugh;
    die Art, wie es gemacht wird the way (that) it’s done;
    im gleichen Maß, wie … to the same extent that …;
    ein Erlebnis, wie man es nur selten hat an experience of a kind that one has only rarely
    wie lang etc
    auch (immer) however long etc, no matter how long etc;
    wie laut sie auch schrie however loud she shouted;
    wie sehr ich mich auch bemühte however hard I tried, try as I would;
    wie dem auch sei be that as it may;
    wie sie auch heißen mögen whatever they’re called
    B. konj
    (so) wie nach adj oder adv: as, meist as … as; nach subst oder v: like;
    ein Mann wie er a man like him;
    in einem Fall wie diesem in a case like this;
    groß wie ein Haus (as) big as a house;
    (nicht) so alt wie (not) as old as;
    so schön wie (noch) nie more beautiful than ever;
    ich fühlte mich wie betäubt/unter Drogen I felt as if I’d been stunned/as if I’d been taking drugs;
    er singt wie selten einer/wie keiner very few people sing/nobody sings like ( oder as well as) he does;
    eine Verrückte she works like a madwoman;
    er sieht nicht wie 50 aus he doesn’t look fifty;
    mit P wie Paula with a P as in Peter;
    sie machte es wie ihr Vater she did like her father
    2. (beispielsweise) such as, like;
    Haustiere wie Hunde, Katzen und Vögel pets such as dogs, cats, and cagebirds
    3. (und) as well as;
    auf dem Land wie in den kleinen Städten both in the country and in the small towns;
    Sommer wie Winter summer and winter;
    Arm wie Reich rich and poor
    ich sah, wie er weglief I saw him running away;
    ich hörte, wie er es sagte I heard him say so ( oder it)
    wie man mir gesagt hat as I’ve been told;
    sie ist reich, wie es scheint she’s rich (so) it appears;
    wie so oft as is often the case; (früher) as ( oder like) so often before;
    wie er nun mal ist being the type of person he is;
    dumm wie er ist stupid as he is;
    wie gehabt umg as before;
    wie gesagt as I said ( oder was saying);
    wie du mir, so ich dir sprichw it’s tit for tat
    6. zeitlich: as, when;
    wie er dies hörte when he heard this;
    wie ich so vorbeiging just as I was passing
    7. umg (als), nach komp: than;
    schneller wie du faster than you;
    anders wie gestern different from yesterday;
    wie wenn as when;
    nichts wie nothing but;
    nichts wie weg hier! let’s get out of here
    * * *
    1.
    1) (auf welche Art u. Weise) how

    wie heißt er/das? — what is his/its name?; what is he/that called?

    wie [bitte]? — [I beg your] pardon?; (entrüstet) I beg your pardon!

    wie war das? — (ugs.) what was that?; what did you say?

    wie kommt es, dass...? — how is it that...?

    wie das? — (ugs.) how did that come about?

    wie war das Wetter? — what was the weather like?; how was the weather?

    wie ist dein neuer Chef? — what is your new boss like? (coll.); how is your new boss? (coll.)

    wie war es in Spanien? — what was Spain like?; what was it like in Spain?

    wie wär's mit... — how about...

    wie lange/groß/hoch/oft/viel? — how long/big/high/often/much?

    und wie! — and how! (coll.)

    4) (ugs.): (nicht wahr)

    das hat dir Spaß gemacht, wie? — you enjoyed that, didn't you?

    2.

    [die Art,] wie er es tut — the way or manner in which he does it

    3.

    [so]... wie... — as... as...

    er macht es [genauso] wie du — he does it [just] like you [do]

    ich fühlte mich wie... — I felt as if I were...

    ‘N’ wie ‘Nordpol’ — N for November

    wie [zum Beispiel] — like; such as

    wie wenn — as if or though

    2) (und, sowie) as well as; both

    Männer wie Frauen — men as well as women; both men and women

    3) (temporal): (als)

    wie ich an seinem Fenster vorbeigehe, höre ich ihn singen — as I pass by his window I hear him singing

    4) (ugs.): (außer)
    * * *
    adv.
    as adv.
    how adv.
    like adj.

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > wie

  • 10 Wie

    I Adv.
    1. bes. in Fragen: how?; nach der Art etc.: what... like?; wie bitte? pardon?, (sorry,) what did you say?; entrüstet: I beg your pardon!; wie? umg., nachfragend, erstaunt: what?; wie, hat er das wirklich gesagt? what, did he really say that?; wie das? how come? umg.; wie alt sind Sie? how old are you?; wie lange ist das her? how long ago is ( oder was) that?; wie viel / viele how much / many; wie viel Uhr ist es? what’s the time?, what time is it?; wie viel ist zwei plus zwei? what is two plus two?, what do two and two make?; wie war’s im Kino? how was the film (Am. movie)?; wie ist er (so)? what’s he like?; wie ist der neue Wagen? what’s the new car like?; wie war das mit dem Unfall? what exactly happened in the accident?; ich weiß nicht, wie das kam I don’t know how it came about; na, wie war das / ich? so how was it / I?; wie wäre es mit...? how about...?; na, wie wär’s ( mit uns beiden)? so, how about it?
    2. umg., als Zusatz: das war doch sehr witzig, wie? that was very funny, wasn’t it?; du magst mich nicht, wie? you don’t like me, do you?
    3. im Ausruf: wie schön! how beautiful!; wie froh war ich! how glad I was; wie gut, dass...! lucky for me ( oder you etc.) that...; wie du das nur immer schaffst! amazing how you always manage it!; wie du wieder aussiehst! just look at you!; und wie! umg. and how!, you bet!
    4. vergleichend: die Art, wie du lachst the way (that) you laugh; die Art, wie es gemacht wird the way (that) it’s done; in dem oder im gleichen Maß, wie... to the same extent that...; ein Erlebnis, wie man es nur selten hat an experience of a kind that one has only rarely
    5. verallgemeinernd: wie lang etc. auch ( immer) however long etc., no matter how long etc.; wie laut sie auch schrie however loud she shouted; wie sehr ich mich auch bemühte however hard I tried, try as I would; wie dem auch sei be that as it may; wie sie auch heißen mögen whatever they’re called
    II Konj.
    1. in Vergleichen: (so) wie nach Adj. oder Adv.: as, meist as... as; nach Subst. oder V.: like; ein Mann wie er a man like him; in einem Fall wie diesem in a case like this; groß wie ein Haus (as) big as a house; ( nicht) so alt wie (not) as old as; so schön wie ( noch) nie more beautiful than ever; ich fühlte mich wie betäubt / unter Drogen I felt as if I’d been stunned / as if I’d been taking drugs; er singt wie selten einer / wie keiner very few people sing / nobody sings like ( oder as well as) he does; sie arbeitet wie verrückt oder eine Verrückte she works like a madwoman; er sieht nicht wie 50 aus he doesn’t look fifty; mit P wie Paula with a P as in Peter; sie machte es wie ihr Vater she did like her father
    2. (beispielsweise) such as, like; Haustiere wie Hunde, Katzen und Vögel pets such as dogs, cats, and cagebirds
    3. (und) as well as; auf dem Land wie in den kleinen Städten both in the country and in the small towns; Sommer wie Winter summer and winter; Arm wie Reich rich and poor
    4. mit Verben der Wahrnehmung: ich sah, wie er weglief I saw him running away; ich hörte, wie er es sagte I heard him say so ( oder it)
    5. mit Teilsatz: wie man mir gesagt hat as I’ve been told; sie ist reich, wie es scheint she’s rich (so) it appears; wie so oft as is often the case; (früher) as ( oder like) so often before; wie er nun mal ist being the type of person he is; dumm wie er ist stupid as he is; wie gehabt umg. as before; wie gesagt as I said ( oder was saying); wie du mir, so ich dir Sprichw. it’s tit for tat
    6. zeitlich: as, when; wie er dies hörte when he heard this; wie ich so vorbeiging just as I was passing
    7. umg. (als), nach Komp.: than; schneller wie du faster than you; anders wie gestern different from yesterday; wie wenn as when; nichts wie nothing but; nichts wie weg hier! let’s get out of here
    * * *
    das Wie
    how
    * * *
    [viː]
    nt -s, no pl

    das Wíé spielt dabei keine Rolle — how (it'll happen/it'll be done etc) is unimportant

    dass es geschehen muss, ist klar, nur das Wíé ist noch ein Problem — it's clear that it has to happen, the only problem is how

    das Wíé und Wann werden wir später besprechen — we'll talk about how and when later

    * * *
    1) (used to introduce a statement of what the speaker knows or believes to be the case: As you know, I'll be leaving tomorrow.) as
    2) (like: He was dressed as a woman.) as
    3) (with certain verbs eg regard, treat, describe, accept: I am regarded by some people as a bit of a fool; He treats the children as adults.) as
    4) ((also how ever) in what way; by what means: However did you get here?; However did you do that?) however
    5) (in what way: How do you make bread?) how
    6) (to what extent: How do you like my new hat?; How far is Paris from London?) how
    7) (by what means: I've no idea how he came here.) how
    8) (in what condition: How are you today?; How do I look?) how
    9) (for what reason: How is it that I am the last to know about this?) how
    10) (the same or similar: They're as like as two peas.) like
    11) (the same as or similar to; in the same or a similar way as: He climbs like a cat; She is like her mother.) like
    * * *
    <-s>
    [vi:]
    der Plan ist grundsätzlich klar, nur das \Wie muss noch festgelegt werden the plan is basically clear, we just have to establish how to implement it
    * * *
    1.
    1) (auf welche Art u. Weise) how

    wie heißt er/das? — what is his/its name?; what is he/that called?

    wie [bitte]? — [I beg your] pardon?; (entrüstet) I beg your pardon!

    wie war das? — (ugs.) what was that?; what did you say?

    wie kommt es, dass...? — how is it that...?

    wie das? — (ugs.) how did that come about?

    wie war das Wetter? — what was the weather like?; how was the weather?

    wie ist dein neuer Chef? — what is your new boss like? (coll.); how is your new boss? (coll.)

    wie war es in Spanien? — what was Spain like?; what was it like in Spain?

    wie wär's mit... — how about...

    wie lange/groß/hoch/oft/viel? — how long/big/high/often/much?

    und wie! — and how! (coll.)

    4) (ugs.): (nicht wahr)

    das hat dir Spaß gemacht, wie? — you enjoyed that, didn't you?

    2.

    [die Art,] wie er es tut — the way or manner in which he does it

    3.

    [so]... wie... — as... as...

    er macht es [genauso] wie du — he does it [just] like you [do]

    ich fühlte mich wie... — I felt as if I were...

    ‘N’ wie ‘Nordpol’ — N for November

    wie [zum Beispiel] — like; such as

    wie wenn — as if or though

    2) (und, sowie) as well as; both

    Männer wie Frauen — men as well as women; both men and women

    3) (temporal): (als)

    wie ich an seinem Fenster vorbeigehe, höre ich ihn singen — as I pass by his window I hear him singing

    4) (ugs.): (außer)
    * * *
    Wie n; -, kein pl:
    auf das Wie kommt es an what matters is how;
    das Wie, Wann und Wo ist noch völlig unklar (the) how, when, and where are still completely unclear
    * * *
    1.
    1) (auf welche Art u. Weise) how

    wie heißt er/das? — what is his/its name?; what is he/that called?

    wie [bitte]? — [I beg your] pardon?; (entrüstet) I beg your pardon!

    wie war das? — (ugs.) what was that?; what did you say?

    wie kommt es, dass...? — how is it that...?

    wie das? — (ugs.) how did that come about?

    wie war das Wetter? — what was the weather like?; how was the weather?

    wie ist dein neuer Chef? — what is your new boss like? (coll.); how is your new boss? (coll.)

    wie war es in Spanien? — what was Spain like?; what was it like in Spain?

    wie wär's mit... — how about...

    wie lange/groß/hoch/oft/viel? — how long/big/high/often/much?

    und wie! — and how! (coll.)

    4) (ugs.): (nicht wahr)

    das hat dir Spaß gemacht, wie? — you enjoyed that, didn't you?

    2.

    [die Art,] wie er es tut — the way or manner in which he does it

    3.

    [so]... wie... — as... as...

    er macht es [genauso] wie du — he does it [just] like you [do]

    ich fühlte mich wie... — I felt as if I were...

    ‘N’ wie ‘Nordpol’ — N for November

    wie [zum Beispiel] — like; such as

    wie wenn — as if or though

    2) (und, sowie) as well as; both

    Männer wie Frauen — men as well as women; both men and women

    3) (temporal): (als)

    wie ich an seinem Fenster vorbeigehe, höre ich ihn singen — as I pass by his window I hear him singing

    4) (ugs.): (außer)
    * * *
    adv.
    as adv.
    how adv.
    like adj.

    Deutsch-Englisch Wörterbuch > Wie

  • 11 Á

    * * *
    a negative suffix to verbs, not;
    era útmakligt, at it is not unmeet that.
    * * *
    1.
    á, prep., often used elliptically, or even adverbially, [Goth. ana; Engl. on; Germ. an. In the Scandinavian idioms the liquid n is absorbed. In English the same has been supposed to happen in adverbial phrases, e. g. ‘along, away, abroad, afoot, again, agate, ahead, aloft, alone, askew, aside, astray, awry,’ etc. It is indeed true that the Ormulum in its northern dialect freq. uses o, even in common phrases, such as ‘o boke, o land, o life, o slæpe, o strande, o write, o naht, o loft,’ etc., v. the glossary; and we may compare on foot and afoot, on sleep (Engl. Vers. of Bible) and asleep; A. S. a-butan and on-butan (about); agen and ongean (again, against); on bæc, aback; on life, alive; on middan, amid. But it is more than likely that in the expressions quoted above, as well as in numberless others, as well in old as in modern English, the English a- as well as the o- of the Ormulum and the modern Scottish and north of England o- are in reality remains of this very á pronounced au or ow, which was brought by the Scandinavian settlers into the north of England. In the struggle for supremacy between the English dialects after the Conquest, the Scandinavian form á or a won the day in many cases to the exclusion of the Anglo-Saxon on. Some of these adverbs have representatives only in the Scandinavian tongues, not in Anglo-Saxon; see below, with dat. B. II, C. VII; with acc. C. I. and VI. The prep. á denotes the surface or outside; í and ór the inside; at, til, and frá, nearness measured to or from an object: á thus answers to the Gr. επί; the Lat. in includes á and i together.]
    With dat. and acc.: in the first case with the notion of remaining on a place, answering to Lat. in with abl.; in the last with the notion of motion to the place, = Lat. in with acc.
    WITH DAT.
    A. Loc.
    I. generally on, upon; á gólfi, on the floor, Nj. 2; á hendi, on the hand (of a ring), 48, 225; á palli, 50; á steini, 108; á vegg, 115; á sjá ok á landi, on sea and land. In some instances the distinction between d and i is loose and wavering, but in most cases common sense and usage decide; thus ‘á bók’ merely denotes the letters, the penmanship, ‘í’ the contents of a book; mod. usage, however, prefers ‘í,’ lesa í bók, but stafr á bók. Old writers on the other hand; á bókum Enskum, in English books, Landn. 24, but í Aldafars bók, 23 (in the book De Mensurâ Temporum, by Bede), cp. Grág. i. 76, where á is a false reading instead of at; á bréfi, the contents of a letter: of clothing or arms, mítr á höfði, sverð á hlið, mitre on head, sword on side, Fms. i. 266, viii. 404; hafa lykil á sér, on one’s person, 655 xxvii. 22; möttull á tyglum, a mantle hanging on (i. e. fastened by) laces, Fms. vii. 201: á þingi means to be present at a meeting; í þingi, to abide within a jurisdiction; á himni, á jörðu, on (Engl. in) heaven and earth, e. g. in the Lord’s Prayer, but í helviti, in hell; á Gimli, Edda (of a heavenly abode); á báti, á skipi denote crew and cargo, ‘í’ the timber or materials of which a ship is built, Eg. 385; vera í stafni á skipi, 177: á skógi, to be abroad in a wood (of a hunter, robber, deer); but to be situated (a house), at work (to fell timber), í skógi, 573, Fs. 5, Fms. iii. 122, viii. 31, xi. 1, Glúm. 330, Landn. 173; á mörkinni, Fms. i. 8, but í mörk, of a farm; á firðinum means lying in a firth, of ships or islands (on the surface of the water), þær eyjar liggja á Breiðafirði, Ld. 36; but í firði, living in a district named Firth; á landi, Nj. 98, Fms. xi. 386.
    II. á is commonly used in connection with the pr. names or countries terminating in ‘land,’ Engl. in, á Englandi, Írlandi, Skotlandi, Bretlandi, Saxlandi, Vindlandi, Vínlandi, Grænalandi, Íslandi, Hálogalandi, Rogalandi, Jótlandi, Frakklandi, Hjaltlandi, Jamtalandi, Hvítramannalandi, Norðrlöndum, etc., vide Landn. and the index to Fms. xii. In old writers í is here very rare, in modern authors more frequent; taste and the context in many instances decide. An Icelander would now say, speaking of the queen or king, ‘á Englandi,’ ruling over, but to live ‘í Englandi,’ or ‘á Englandi;’ the rule in the last case not being quite fixed.
    2. in connection with other names of countries: á Mæri, Vörs, Ögðum, Fjölum, all districts of Norway, v. Landn.; á Mýrum (in Icel.), á Finnmörk, Landn., á Fjóni (a Danish island); but í Danmörk, Svíþjóð (á Svíþjóðu is poët., Gs. 13).
    3. before Icel. farms denoting open and elevated slopes and spaces (not too high, because then ‘at’ must be used), such as ‘staðr, völlr, ból, hjalli, bakki, heimr, eyri,’ etc.; á Veggjum, Landn. 69; á Hólmlátri, id.: those ending in ‘-staðr,’ á Geirmundarstöðum, Þórisstöðum, Jarðlangsstöðum…, Landn.: ‘-völlr,’ á Möðruvöllum: á Fitjum (the farm) í Storð (the island), í Fenhring (the island) á Aski (the farm), Landn., Eg.: ‘-nes’ sometimes takes á, sometimes í (in mod. usage always ‘í’), á Nesi, Eb. 14, or í Krossnesi, 30; in the last case the notion of island, νησος, prevails: so also, ‘fjörðr,’ as, þeir börðust á Vigrafirði (of a fight o n the ice), Landn. 101, but orusta í Hafrsfirði, 122: with ‘-bær,’ á is used in the sense of a farm or estate, hón sa á e-m bæ mikit hús ok fagrt, Edda 22; ‘í bæ’ means within doors, of the buildings: with ‘Bær’ as pr. name Landn. uses ‘í,’ 71, 160, 257, 309, 332.
    4. denoting on or just above; of the sun, when the time is fixed by regarding the sun in connection with points in the horizon, a standing phrase in Icel.; sól á gjáhamri, when the sun is on the crag of the Rift, Grág. i. 26, cp. Glúm. 387; so, brú á á, a bridge on a river, Fms. viii. 179, Hrafn. 20; taka hús á e-m, to surprise one, to take the house over his head, Fms. i. 11.
    III. á is sometimes used in old writers where we should now expect an acc., esp. in the phrase, leggja sverði (or the like) á e-m, or á e-m miðjum, to stab, Eg. 216, Gísl. 106, Band. 14; þá stakk Starkaðr sprotanum á konungi, then Starkad stabbed the king with the wand, Fas. iii. 34; bíta á kampi (vör), to bite the lips, as a token of pain or emotion, Nj. 209, 68; taka á e-u, to touch a thing, lay hold of it, v. taka; fá á e-u, id. (poët.); leggja hendr á (better at) síðum, in wrestling, Fms. x. 331; koma á úvart á e-m, to come on one unawares, ix. 407 (rare).
    B. TEMP. of a particular point or period of time, at, on, in:
    I. gener. denoting during, in the course of; á nótt, degi, nætrþeli …, Bs. i. 139; or spec. adding a pron. or an adject., á næsta sumri, the next summer; á því ári, þingi, misseri, hausti, vári, sumri …, during, in that year …, Bs. i. 679, etc.; á þrem sumrum, in the course of three summers, Grág. i. 218; á þrem várum, Fms. ii. 114; á hálfs mánaðar fresti, within half a month’s delay, Nj. 99; á tvítugs, sextugs … aldri, á barns, gamals aldri, etc., at the age of …, v. aldr: á dögum e-s, in the days of, in his reign or time, Landn. 24, Hrafn. 3, Fms. ix. 229.
    II. used of a fixed recurrent period or season; á várum, sumrum, haustum, vetrum, á kveldum, every spring, summer …, in the evenings, Eg. 711, Fms. i. 23, 25, vi. 394, Landn. 292: with the numeral adverbs, cp. Lat. ter in anno, um sinn á mánuði, ári, once a month, once a year, where the Engl. a is not the article but the preposition, Grág. i. 89.
    III. of duration; á degi, during a whole day, Fms. v. 48; á sjau nóttum, Bárð. 166; á því meli, during that time, in the meantime, Grág. i. 259.
    IV. connected with the seasons (á vetri, sumri, vári, hausti), ‘á’ denotes the next preceding season, the last winter, summer, autumn, Eb. 40, 238, Ld. 206: in such instances ‘á’ denotes the past, ‘at’ the future, ‘í’ the present; thus í vetri in old writers means this winter; á vetri, last winter; at vetri, next winter, Eb. 68 (in a verse), etc.
    C. In various other relations, more or less metaphorically, on, upon, in, to, with, towards, against:
    I. denoting object, in respect of, against, almost periphrastically; dvelja á náðum e-s, under one’s protection, Fms. i. 74; hafa metnað á e-u, to be proud of, to take pride in a thing, 127.
    2. denoting a personal relation, in; bæta e-t á e-m, to make amends, i. e. to one personally; misgöra e-t á e-m, to inflict wrong on one; hafa elsku (hatr) á e-m, to bear love ( hatred) to one, Fms. ix. 242; hefna sín á e-m, to take revenge on one’s person, on anyone; rjúfa sætt á e-m, to break truce on the person of any one, to offend against his person, Nj. 103; hafa sár á sér, 101; sjá á e-m, to read on or in one’s face; sér hann á hverjum manni hvárt til þín er vel eðr illa, 106; var þat brátt auðséð á hennar högum, at …, it could soon be seen in all her doings, that …, Ld. 22.
    3. also generally to shew signs of a thing; sýna fáleika á sér, to shew marks of displeasure, Nj. 14, Fs. 14; taka vel, illa, lítt, á e-u, to take a thing well, ill, or indifferently, id.; finna á sér, to feel in oneself; fann lítt á honum, hvárt …, it could hardly be seen in his face, whether …, Eb. 42; líkindi eru á, it is likely, Ld. 172; göra kost á e-u, to give a choice, chance of it, 178; eiga vald á e-u, to have power over …, Nj. 10.
    II. denoting encumbrance, duty, liability; er fimtardómsmál á þeim, to be subject to …, Nj. 231; the phrase, hafa e-t á hendi, or vera á hendi e-m, on one’s hands, of work or duty to be done; eindagi á fé, term, pay day, Grág. i. 140; ómagi (skylda, afvinna) á fé, of a burden or encumbrance, D. I. and Grág. in several passages.
    III. with a personal pronoun, sér, mér, honum …, denoting personal appearance, temper, character, look, or the like; vera þungr, léttr … á sér, to be heavy or light, either bodily or mentally; þungr á sér, corpulent, Sturl. i. 112; kátr ok léttr á sér, of a gay and light temper, Fms. x. 152; þat bragð hafði hann á sér, he looked as if, … the expression of his face was as though …, Ld., cp. the mod. phrase, hafa á sér svip, bragð, æði, sið, of one’s manner or personal appearance, to bear oneself as, or the like; skjótr (seinn) á fæti, speedy ( slow) of foot, Nj. 258.
    IV. as a periphrasis of the possessive pronoun connected with the limbs or parts of the body. In common Icel. such phrases as my hands, eyes, head … are hardly ever used, but höfuð, eyru, hár, nef, munnr, hendr, fætr … á mér; so ‘í’ is used of the internal parts, e. g. hjarta, bein … í mér; the eyes are regarded as inside the body, augun í honum: also without the possessive pronoun, or as a periphrasis for a genitive, brjóstið á e-m, one’s breast, Nj. 95, Edda 15; súrnar í augum, it smarts in my eyes, my eyes smart, Nj. 202; kviðinn á sér, its belly, 655 xxx. 5, Fms. vi. 350; hendr á henni, her hands, Gísl. (in a verse); í vörunum á honum, on his lips, Band. 14; ristin á honum, his step, Fms. viii. 141; harðr í tungu, sharp of tongue, Hallfred (Fs. 114); kalt (heitt) á fingrum, höndum, fótum …, cold ( warm) in the fingers, hands, feet …, i. e. with cold fingers, etc.; cp. also the phrase, verða vísa (orð) á munni, of extemporising verses or speeches, freq. in the Sagas; fastr á fótum, fast by the leg, of a bondsman, Nj. 27: of the whole body, díla fundu þeir á honum, 209. The pers. pron. is used only in solemn style (poetry, hymns, the Bible), and perhaps only when influenced by foreign languages, e. g. mitt hjarta hví svo hryggist þú, as a translation of ‘warumb betrübst du dich mein Herz?’ the famous hymn by Hans Sachs; instead of the popular hjartað í mér, Sl. 43, 44: hjartað mitt is only used as a term of endearment, as by a husband to his wife, parents to their child, or the like, in a metaphorical sense; the heart proper is ‘í mér,’ not ‘mitt.’
    2. of other things, and as a periphrasis of a genitive, of a part belonging to the whole, e. g. dyrr á husi = húsdyrr, at the house-doors; turn á kirkju = kirkju turn; stafn, skutr, segl, árar … á skipi, the stem, stern, sail … of a ship, Fms. ix. 135; blöð á lauk, á tré …, leaves of a leek, of a tree …, Fas. i. 469; egg á sverði = sverðs egg; stafr á bók; kjölr á bók, and in endless other instances.
    V. denoting instrumentality, by, on, or a-, by means of; afla fjár á hólmgöngum, to make money a-duelling, by means of duels, Eg. 498; á verkum sínum, to subsist on one’s own work, Njarð. 366: as a law term, sekjast á e-ju, to be convicted upon …, Grág. i. 123; sekst maðr þar á sínu eigini ( a man is guilty in re sua), ef hann tekr af þeim manni er heimild ( possessio) hefir til, ii. 191; falla á verkum sínum, to be killed flagranti delicto, v. above; fella e-n á bragði, by a sleight in wrestling; komast undan á flótta, to escape by flight, Eg. 11; á hlaupi, by one’s feet, by speed, Hkr. ii. 168; lifa á e-u, to feed on; bergja á e-u, to taste of a thing; svala sér á e-u, to quench the thirst on.
    VI. with subst. numerals; á þriðja tigi manna, up to thirty, i. e. from about twenty to thirty, Ld. 194; á öðru hundraði skipa, from one to two hundred sail strong, Fms. x. 126; á níunda tigi, between eighty and ninety years of age, Eg. 764, v. above: used as prep., á hendi, on one’s hand, i. e. bound to do it, v. hönd.
    VII. in more or less adverbial phrases it may often be translated in Engl. by a participle and a- prefixed; á lopti, aloft; á floti, afloat; á lífi, alive; á verðgangi, a-begging; á brautu, away; á baki, a-back, behind, past; á milli, a-tween; á laun, alone, secretly; á launungu, id.; á móti, against; á enda, at an end, gone; á huldu, hidden; fara á hæli, to go a-heel, i. e. backwards, Fms. vii. 70;—but in many cases these phrases are transl. by the Engl. partic. with a, which is then perh. a mere prefix, not a prep., á flugi, a-flying in the air, Nj. 79; vera á gangi, a-going; á ferli, to be about; á leiki, a-playing, Fms. i. 78; á sundi, a-swimming, ii. 27; á verði, a-watching, x. 201; á hrakningi, a-wandering; á reiki, a-wavering; á skjálfi, a-shivering; á-hleri, a-listening; á tali, a-talking, Ísl. ii. 200; á hlaupi, a-running, Hkr. ii. 268; á verki, a-working; á veiðum, a-hunting; á fiski, a-fishing; á beit, grazing: and as a law term it even means in flagranti, N. G. L. i. 348.
    VIII. used absolutely without a case in reference to the air or the weather, where ‘á’ is almost redundant; þoka var á mikil, a thick fog came on, Nj. 267; niðamyrkr var á, pitch darkness came on, Eg. 210; allhvast á norðan, a very strong breeze from the north, Fms. ix. 20; þá var á norðrænt, a north wind came on, 42, Ld. 56; hvaðan sem á er, from whatever point the wind is; var á hríð veðrs, a snow storm came on, Nj. 282; görði á regn, rain came on, Fms. vi. 394, xi. 35, Ld. 156.
    WITH ACC.
    A. Loc.
    I. denoting simple direction towards, esp. connected with verbs of motion, going, or the like; hann gékk á bergsnös, Eg. 389; á hamar, Fas. ii. 517.
    2. in phrases denoting direction; liggja á útborða, lying on the outside of the ship, Eg. 354; á annat borð skipinu, Fms. vii. 260; á bæði borð, on both sides of the ship, Nj. 124, Ld. 56; á tvær hliðar, on both sides, Fms. v. 73. Ísl. ii. 159; á hlið, sidewards; út á hlið, Nj. 262, Edda 44; á aðra hönd henni, Nj. 50, Ld. 46; höggva á tvær hendr, to hew or strike right and left, Ísl. ii. 368, Fas. i. 384, Fms. viii. 363, x. 383.
    3. upp á, upon; hann tók augu Þjaza ok kastaði upp á himin, Edda 47: with verbs denoting to look, see, horfa, sjá, líta, etc.; hann rak skygnur á land, he cast glances towards the land, Ld. 154.
    II. denoting direction with or without the idea of arriving:
    1. with verbs denoting to aim at; of a blow or thrust, stefna á fótinn, Nj. 84; spjótið stefnir á hann miðjan, 205: of the wind, gékk veðrit á vestr, the wind veered to west, Fms. ix. 28; sigla á haf, to stand out to sea, Hkr. i. 146, Fms. i. 39: with ‘út’ added, Eg. 390, Fms. x. 349.
    2. conveying the notion of arriving, or the intervening space being traversed; spjótið kom á miðjan skjöldinn, Eg. 379, Nj. 96, 97; langt upp á land, far up inland, Hkr. i. 146: to reach, taka ofan á belti, of the long locks of a woman, to reach down to the belt, Nj. 2; ofan á bringu, 48; á þa ofan, 91.
    III. without reference to the space traversed, connected with verbs denoting to go, turn, come, ride, sail, throw, or the like, motion of every kind; hann kastar honum á völlinn, he flings him down, Nj. 91; hlaupa á skip sitt, to leap on board his ship, 43; á hest, to mount quickly, Edda 75; á lend hestinum, Nj. 91; hann gengr á sáðland sitt, he walks on to his fields, 82: on, upon, komast á fætr, to get upon one’s legs, 92; ganga á land, to go a-shore, Fms. i. 40; ganga á þing, vii. 242, Grág. (often); á skóg, á merkr ok skóga, into a wood, Fb. i. 134, 257, Fms. xi. 118, Eg. 577, Nj. 130; fara á Finnmörk, to go travelling in Finmark, Fms. i. 8; koma, fara á bæ, to arrive at the farm-house; koma á veginn, Eg. 578; stíga á bát, skip, to go on board, 158; hann gékk upp á borg, he went up to the burg (castle), 717; en er þeir komu á loptriðið, 236; hrinda skipum á vatn, to float the ships down into the water, Fms. i. 58; reka austr á haf, to drift eastwards on the sea, x. 145; ríða ofan á, to ride down or over, Nj. 82.
    IV. in some cases the acc. is used where the dat. would be used, esp. with verbs denoting to see or hear, in such phrases as, þeir sá boða mikinn inn á fjörðinn, they saw great breakers away up in the bight of the firth, the acc. being due perhaps to a motion or direction of the eye or ear towards the object, Nj. 124; sá þeir fólkit á land, they saw the people in the direction of land, Fas. ii. 517: in phrases denoting to be placed, to sit, to be seated, the seat or bench is freq. in the acc. where the dat. would now be used; konungr var þar á land upp, the king was then up the country, the spectator or narrator is conceived as looking from the shore or sea-side, Nj. 46; sitja á miðjan bekk, to be seated on the middle bench, 50; skyldi konungs sæti vera á þann bekk … annat öndvegi var á hinn úæðra pall; hann setti konungs hásæti á miðjan þverpall, Fms. vi. 439, 440, cp. Fagrsk. l. c., Sturl. iii. 182; eru víða fjallbygðir upp á mörkina, in the mark or forest, Eg. 58; var þar mörk mikil á land upp, 229; mannsafnaðr er á land upp (viewed from the sea), Ld. 76; stóll var settr á mótið, Fas. i. 58; beiða fars á skip, to beg a passage, Grág. i. 90.
    V. denoting parts of the body; bíta e-n á barka, to bite one in the throat, Ísl. ii. 447; skera á háls, to cut the throat of any one, Nj. 156; brjóta e-n á háls, to break any one’s neck; brjóta e-n á bak, to break any one’s back, Fms. vii. 119; kalinn á kné, frozen to the knees with cold, Hm. 3.
    VI. denoting round; láta reipi á háls hesti, round his horse’s neck, 623. 33; leggja söðul á hest, Nj. 83; and ellipt., leggja á, to saddle; breiða feld á hofuð sér, to wrap a cloak over his head, 164; reyta á sik mosa, to gather moss to cover oneself with, 267; spenna hring á hönd, á fingr, Eg. 300.
    VII. denoting a burden; stela mat á tvá hesta, hey á fimtán hesta, i. e. a two, a fifteen horse load, Nj. 74: metaph., kjósa feigð á menn, to choose death upon them, i. e. doom them to death, Edda 22.
    B. TEMP.
    I. of a period of time, at, to; á morgun, to-morrow (í morgun now means the past morning, the morning of to-day), Ísl. ii. 333.
    II. if connected with the word day, ‘á’ is now used before a fixed or marked day, a day of the week, a feast day, or the like; á Laugardag, á Sunnudag …, on Saturday, Sunday, the Old Engl. a-Sunday, a-Monday, etc.; á Jóladaginn, Páskadaginn, on Yule and Easter-day; but in old writers more often used ellipt. Sunnudaginn, Jóladaginn …, by dropping the prep. ‘á,’ Fms. viii. 397, Grág. i. 18.
    III. connected with ‘dagr’ with the definite article suffixed, ‘á’ denotes a fixed, recurring period or season, in; á daginn, during the day-time, every day in turn, Grett. 91 A.
    IV. connected with ‘evening, morning, the seasons,’ with the article; á kveldit, every evening, Ld. 14; á sumarit, every summer, Vd. 128, where the new Ed. Fs. 51 reads sumrum; á haust, every autumn, Eg. 741 (perh. a misprint instead of á haustin or á haustum); á vetrinn, in the winter time, 710; á várit, every spring, Gþl. 347; the sing., however, is very rare in such cases, the old as well as mod. usage prefers the plur.; á nætrnar, by night, Nj. 210; á várin, Eg. 710; á sumrin, haustin, á morgnana, in the morning (á morgin, sing., means to-morrow); á kveldin, in the evening, only ‘dagr’ is used in sing., v. above (á daginn, not á dagana); but elliptically and by dropping the article, Icelanders say, kveld og morgna, nótt og dag, vetr sumar vor og haust, in the same sense as those above mentioned.
    V. denoting duration, the article is dropped in the negative phrase, aldri á sinn dag, never during one’s life; aldri á mína daga, never in my life, Bjarn. 8, where a possess. pron. is put between noun and prep., but this phrase is very rare. Such phrases as, á þann dag, that day, and á þenna dag, Stj. 12, 655 xxx. 2. 20, are unclassical.
    VI. á dag without article can only be used in a distributive sense, e. g. tvisvar á dag, twice a-day; this use is at present freq. in Icel., yet instances from old writers are not on record.
    VII. denoting a movement onward in time, such as, liðið á nótt, dag, kveld, morgun, sumar, vetr, vár, haust (or nóttina, daginn …), jól, páska, föstu, or the like, far on in the night, day …, Edda 33; er á leið vetrinn, when the winter was well on, as the winter wore on, Nj. 126; cp. áliðinn: also in the phrase, hniginn á inn efra aldr, well stricken in years, Ld. 68.
    C. Metaph. and in various relations:
    I. somewhat metaphorically, denoting an act only (not the place); fara á fund, á vit e-s, to call for one, Eg. 140; koma á ræðu við e-n, to come to a parley with, to speak, 173; ganga á tal, Nj. 103; skora á hólm, to challenge to a duel on an island; koma á grið, to enter into a service, to be domiciled, Grág. i. 151; fara á veiðar, to go a-hunting, Fms. i. 8.
    β. generally denoting on, upon, in, to; bjóða vöxtu á féit, to offer interest on the money, Grág. i. 198; ganga á berhögg, to come to blows, v. berhögg; fá á e-n, to make an impression upon one, Nj. 79; ganga á vápn e-s, to throw oneself on an enemy’s weapon, meet him face to face, Rd. 310; ganga á lagið, to press on up the spear-shaft after it has passed through one so as to get near one’s foe, i. e. to avail oneself of the last chance; bera fé á e-n, to bribe, Nj. 62; bera öl á e-n, to make drunk, Fas. i. 13; snúinn á e-t, inclined to, Fms. x. 142; sammælast á e-t, to agree upon, Nj. 86; sættast, verða sáttr á e-t, in the same sense, to come to an agreement, settlement, or atonement, 78, Edda 15, Eb. 288, Ld. 50, Fms. i. 279; ganga á mála, to serve for pay as a soldier, Nj. 121; ganga á vald e-s, to put oneself in his power, 267; ganga á sætt, to break an agreement; vega á veittar trygðir, to break truce, Grág. ii. 169.
    II. denoting in regard to, in respect to:
    1. of colour, complexion, the hue of the hair, or the like; hvítr, jarpr, dökkr … á hár, having white, brown, or dark … hair, Ísl. ii. 190, Nj. 39; svartr á brún ok brá, dark of brow and eyebrow; dökkr á hörund, id., etc.
    2. denoting skill, dexterity; hagr á tré, a good carpenter; hagr á járn, málm, smíðar …, an expert worker in iron, metals …, Eg. 4; fimr á boga, good at the bow: also used of mastership in science or arts, meistari á hörpuslátt, a master in striking the harp, Fas. iii. 220; fræðimaðr á kvæði, knowing many poems by heart, Fms. vi. 391; fræðimaðr á landnámssögur ok forna fræði, a learned scholar in histories and antiquities (of Are Frode), Ísl. ii. 189; mikill á íþrótt, skilful in an art, Edda (pref.) 148; but dat. in the phrase, kunna (vel) á skíðum, to be a cunning skater, Fms. i. 9, vii. 120.
    3. denoting dimensions; á hæð, lengd, breidd, dýpt …, in the heighth, length, breadth, depth …, Eg. 277; á hvern veg, on each side, Edda 41 (square miles); á annan veg, on the one side, Grág. i. 89.
    β. the phrase, á sik, in regard to oneself, vel (illa) á sik kominn, of a fine ( ugly) appearance, Ld. 100, Fas. iii. 74.
    III. denoting instrumentality; bjargast á sínar hendr, to live on the work of one’s own hands, (á sínar spýtur is a mod. phrase in the same sense); (vega) á skálir, pundara, to weigh in scales, Grág. ii. 370; at hann hefði tvá pundara, ok hefði á hinn meira keypt en á hinn minna selt, of a man using two scales, a big one for buying and a little one for selling, Sturl. i. 91; á sinn kostnað, at one’s own expense; nefna e-n á nafn, by name, Grág. i. 17, etc. The Icel. also say, spinna á rokk, snældu, to spin on or with a rock or distaff; mala á kvern, to grind in a ‘querne,’ where Edda 73 uses dat.; esp. of musical instruments, syngja, leika á hljóðfæri, hörpu, gígju …; in the old usage, leika hörpu …, Stj. 458.
    IV. denoting the manner or way of doing:
    1. á þessa lund, in this wise, Grág. ii. 22; á marga vega, á alla, ymsa vega, in many, all, respects, Fms. i. 114; á sitt hóf, in its turn, respectively, Ld. 136, where the context shews that the expression answers to the Lat. mutatis mutandis; á Þýðersku, after German fashion, Sks. 288.
    2. esp. of language; mæla, rita á e-a tungu, to speak, write in a tongue; á Írsku, in Irish, Ld. 76; Norrænu, in Norse, Eb. 330, Vm. 35; a Danska tungu, in Danish, i. e. Scandinavian, Norse, or Icelandic, Grág. i. 18; á Vára tungu, i. e. in Icelandic, 181; rita á Norræna tungu, to write in Norse, Hkr. (pref.), Bs. i. 59:—at present, dat. is sometimes used.
    3. in some phrases the acc. is used instead of the dat.; hann sýndi á sik mikit gaman, Fms. x. 329; hann lét ekki á sik finna, he shewed no sign of motion, Nj. 111; skaltú önga fáleika á þik gera (Cod. Kalf.), 14.
    V. used in a distributive sense; skal mörk kaupa gæzlu á kú, eðr oxa fim vetra gamlan, a mark for every cow, Grág. i. 147; alin á hvert hross, 442; á mann, per man (now freq.): cp. also á dag above, lit. B.
    VI. connected with nouns,
    1. prepositional; á hendr (with dat.), against; á hæla, at heel, close behind; á bak, at back, i. e. past, after; á vit (with gen.), towards.
    2. adverbially; á braut, away, abroad; á víxl, in turns; á mis, amiss; á víð ok dreif, a-wide and a-drift, i. e. dispersedly.
    3. used almost redundantly before the following prep.; á eptir, after, behind; á undan, in front of; á meðal, á milli, among; á mót, against; á við, about, alike; á frá (cp. Swed. ifrån), from (rare); á fyrir = fyrir, Haustl. 1; á hjá, beside (rare); á fram, a-head, forwards; á samt, together; ávalt = of allt, always: following a prep., upp á, upon; niðr á, down upon; ofan á, eptir á, post eventum, (temp.) á eptir is loc., id., etc.
    VII. connected with many transitive verbs, answering to the Lat. ad- or in-, in composition, in many cases periphrastically for an objective case. The prep. generally follows after the verb, instead of being prefixed to it as in Lat., and answers to the Engl. on, to; heita kalla, hrópa á, to call on; heyra, hlusta, hlyða á, to hearken to, listen to; hyggja, hugsa á, to think on; minna á, to remind; sjá, líta, horfa, stara, mæna, glápa, koma auga … á, to look on; girnast á, to wish for; trúa á, to believe on; skora á, to call on any one to come out, challenge; kæra á, to accuse; heilsa á, to greet; herja, ganga, ríða, hlaupa, ráða … á, to fall on, attack, cp. ágangr, áreið, áhlaup; ljúga á, to tell lies of, to slander; telja á, to carp at; ausa, tala, hella, kasta, verpa … á, to pour, throw on; ríða, bera, dreifa á, to sprinkle on; vanta, skorta á, to fall short of; ala á, to plead, beg; leggja á, to throw a spell on, lay a saddle on; hætta á, to venture on; gizka á, to guess at; kveða á, to fix on, etc.: in a reciprocal sense, haldast á, of mutual strife; sendast á, to exchange presents; skrifast á, to correspond (mod.); kallast á, to shout mutually; standast á, to coincide, so as to be just opposite one another, etc.
    2.
    f. [Lat. aqua; Goth. ahva; Hel. aha; A. S. eâ; O. H. G. aha, owa; cp. Germ. ach and aue; Fr. eau, eaux; Engl. Ax-, Ex-, etc., in names of places; Swed.-Dan. å; the Scandinavians absorb the hu, so that only a single vowel or diphthong remains of the whole word]:—a river. The old form in nom. dat. acc. sing. is , v. the introduction to A, page 1, Bs. i. 333 sq., where ́n, ́ (acc.), and ́na; so also Greg. 677; the old fragm. of Grág. ii. 222, 223, new Ed. In the Kb. of the Edda the old form occurs twice, viz. page 75, ́na (acc.), (but two lines below, ána), í ́nni (dat.) The old form also repeatedly occurs in the Kb. and Sb. of the Grág., e. g. ii. 266, 267: gen. sing. ár; nom. pl. ár, gen. á contracted, dat. ám, obsolete form ́m; Edda 43, Eg. 80, 99, 133, 185: proverbs, at ósi skal á stemma, answering to the Lat. principiis obsta, Edda 60; hér kemr á til sæfar, here the river runs into the sea, metaph. = this is the very end, seems to have been a favourite ending of old poems; it is recorded in the Húsdrápa and the Norðsetadrápa, v. Edda 96, Skálda 198; cp. the common saying, oil vötn renna til sævar, ‘all waters run into the sea.’ Rivers with glacier water are in Icel. called Hvítá, White river, or Jökulsá: Hitá, Hot river, from a hot spring, opp. to Kaldá, v. Landn.: others take a name from the fish in them, as Laxá, Lax or Salmon river (freq.); Örriða á, etc.: a tributary river is þverá, etc.: ár in the Njála often means the great rivers Ölfusá and Þjórsá in the south of Iceland. Áin helga, a river in Sweden, Hkr. ii: á is also suffixed to the names of foreign rivers, Tempsá = Thames; Dóná, Danube (Germ. Don-au), (mod.), etc. Vide Edda (Gl.) 116, 117, containing the names of over a hundred North-English and Scottish rivers.
    COMPDS: áráll, árbakki, árbrot, ardjúp, árfarvegr, árfors, árgljúfr, árhlutr, ármegin, árminni, ármót, áróss, árreki, árstraumr, árströnd, árvað, árvegr, árvöxtr.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > Á

  • 12 κατά

    κατά (Hom.+) prep. (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά beg., also LfgrE s.v. κατά 1346; with the gen. 74 times in NT; w. acc. 391 times in NT).
    A. w. the gen.
    ⓐ of location that is relatively lower, down from someth. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Ath. 1, 4 κ. κόρρης προπηλακίζειν=to smack on one side of the head) ὁρμᾶν κ. τοῦ κρημνοῦ rush down (from) the bank (cp. Polyb. 38, 16, 7 κ. τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτειν; Jos., Bell. 1, 313) Mt 8:32; Mk 5:13; Lk 8:33. κ. κεφαλῆς ἔχειν have someth. on one’s head (lit. hanging down fr. the head, as a veil. Cp. Plut., Mor. 200f ἐβάδιζε κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 5 of a mummy ἔχων τάβλαν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου) 1 Cor 11:4.
    ⓑ of position relatively deep, into someth. (Od. 9, 330 κ. σπείους ‘into the depths of the cave’; Hdt. 7, 235; X., An. 7, 1, 30) ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία extreme (lit. ‘reaching down into the depths’; cp. Strabo 9, 3, 5 [419] ἄντρον κοῖλον κ. βάθους) or abysmal poverty 2 Cor 8:2. This may perh. be the mng. of πλήσσειν τινὰ κ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν strike someone deep into the eyes ApcPt 11:26 (cp. Demosth. 19, 197 ξαίνει κ. τοῦ νώτου; PPetr II, 18 [2b], 15 [246 B.C.] ἔτυπτεν αὐτὸν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου).—κ. γαστρός Just., D. 78, 3 for ἐν γαστρί Mt 1:18 (cp. Ath. 35, 2 τὸ κ. γαστρὸς ζῶον εἶναι).
    ⓒ extension in various directions within an area, throughout (so in Luke’s writings; Polyb. 3, 19, 7 κ. τῆς νήσου διεσπάρησαν; PGiss 48, 8 κ. κυριακῆς γῆς; Jos., Ant. 8, 297; SibOr 3, 222; 4, 24; 5, 305) γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθʼ ὅλης Ἰόππης become known throughout all Joppa Ac 9:42. καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 9:31; 10:37; Lk 23:5. φήμη ἐξῆλθεν καθʼ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 4:14.
    ② down upon, toward, against someone or someth, fig. ext. of 1.
    ⓐ w. verbs of swearing, to denote what one swears by (Thu. 5, 47, 8; Lysias 32, 13; Isaeus 7, 28; Demosth. 21, 119; 29, 26; SIG 526, 4ff; 685, 25; UPZ 110, 39 [164 B.C.]; BGU 248, 13; Jdth 1:12; Is 45:23; 2 Ch 36:13) by ἐξορκίζειν (q.v.) Mt 26:63. ὀμνύναι (q.v.) Hb 6:13, 16. ὁρκίζειν (q.v.) Hs 9, 10, 5. Sim. ἐρωτᾶν κ. τινος request, entreat by someone Hv 3, 2, 3.
    ⓑ in a hostile sense, against
    α. after verbs that express hostile action, etc. διχάζειν Mt 10:35. ἐπαίρεσθαι 2 Cor 10:5. ἰσχύειν Ac 19:16. κακοῦν 14:2. στρατεύεσθαι 1 Pt 2:11. φυσιοῦσθαι 1 Cor 4:6
    β. after words and expressions that designate hostile speech, esp. an accusation ἔχειν (τι) κ. τινος have or hold someth. against someone Rv 2:4, 14, 20. φέρειν J 18:29. ἐγκαλεῖν Ro 8:33. ἐντυγχάνειν τινὶ κ. τινος 11:2 (TestJob 17:5). κατηγορεῖν Lk 23:14. ποιεῖν κρίσιν Jd 15a. τὸ κ. ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον the bond that stands against us Col 2:14. ἐμφανίζειν Ac 24:1; 25:2. αἰτεῖσθαί τι 25:3, 15. αἱ κ. τινος αἰτίαι vs. 27. εἰπεῖν πονηρόν Mt 5:11 (cp. Soph., Phil. 65 κακὰ λέγειν κ. τινος. X., Hell. 1, 5, 2; Isocr., C. Nic. 13; Plut., Mor. 2a λέγειν κ.; SIG 1180, 1 λέγειν κ. τινος; Just., A I, 23, 3; 49, 6 κ. τῶν … ὁμολογούντων). λαλεῖν ῥήματα Ac 6:13; cp. Jd 15b (TestDan 4:3; JosAs 23:15). μαρτυρεῖν κ. τ. θεοῦ give testimony in contradiction to God 1 Cor 15:15. ζητεῖν μαρτυρίαν κ. τινος testimony against someone Mk 14:55. ψευδομαρτυρεῖν 14:56f. ψευδομαρτυρία Mt 26:59. γογγύζειν 20:11. στενάζειν Js 5:9. διδάσκειν Ac 21:28. συμβούλιον διδόναι (ποιεῖν v.l.) Mk 3:6; ς. λαβεῖν Mt 27:1. ψεύδεσθαι Js 3:14 (Lysias 22, 7; X., Ap. 13; Ath. 35, 1 καθʼ ἡμῶν … κατεψεύσατο).
    γ. after expressions that designate such a position or state of mind in a different way εἶναι κ. τινος be against someone (opp. ὑπέρ) Mk 9:40 (WNestle, ZNW 13, 1912, 84–87; AFridrichsen, ibid., 273–80); Ro 8:31; (opp. μετά) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23. δύνασθαί τι κ. τινος be able to do someth. against someone 2 Cor 13:8. ἔχειν τι κ. τινος have someth. against someone (in one’s heart) Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; Hs 9, 24, 2; cp. ibid. 23, 2, where the acc. is to be supplied. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. ἐπιθυμεῖν Gal 5:17. μερίζεσθαι καθʼ ἑαυτῆς Mt 12:25. Cp. 1 Cl 39:4 (Job 4:18).—κατά prob. means against also in ἔβαλεν κατʼ αὐτῆς ἄνεμος Ac 27:14. ἐτελείωσαν κ. τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα they completed the full measure of sins against their own head GPt 5:17.
    B. w. acc. (so in the NT 399 times [besides καθʼ εἷς and κατὰ εἷς])
    ⓐ of extension in space, along, over, through, in, upon (Hom. et al.; OGI 90, 7 ἐκ τῶν κ. τ. χώραν ἱερῶν; PHib 82, 19; PTebt 5, 188; LXX; Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 5) Ac 24:12. καθʼ ὅλην τ. πόλιν throughout the city Lk 8:39 (cp. Diod S 4, 10, 6 καθʼ ὅλην τὴν Ἐλλάδα). ἐγένετο λιμὸς κ. τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην 15:14. κ. τὰς κώμας 9:6. κ. πόλεις καὶ κώμας 13:22 (Appian., Maced. 9 §1 and 4 κ. πόλεις; Just., A I, 67, 3 κ. πόλεις ἢ ἀγρούς).—κ. τόπους in place after place Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:11 (Theophr., περὶ σημ. 1, 4 p. 389 W.; Cat. Cod. Astr. III 28, 11 ἐν μέρει τ. ἀνατολῆς κ. τόπους, VIII/3, 186, 1 λιμὸς καὶ λοιμὸς καὶ σφαγαὶ κ. τόπους). οἱ ὄντες κ. τὴν Ἰουδαίαν those throughout Judea or living in Judea Ac 11:1. διασπαρῆναι κ. τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας be scattered over the regions of Judea 8:1. κ. τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν in the congregation there 13:1. τοῖς κ. τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν καὶ Συρίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν ἀδελφοῖς 15:23. τοὺς κ. τὰ ἔθνη Ἰουδαίους the Judeans (dispersed) throughout the nations 21:21. τοῖς κ. τὸν νόμον γεγραμμένοις throughout the law = in the law 24:14b. κ. τὴν ὁδόν along or on the way (Lucian, Catapl. 4; Jos., Ant. 8, 404) Lk 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. τὸ κ. Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν πέλαγος the sea along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia 27:5; but the geographical designation τὰ μέρη τ. Λιβύης τῆς κ. Κυρήνην 2:10 prob. belongs to b: the parts of Libya toward Cyrene.
    ⓑ of extension toward, toward, to, up to ἐλθεῖν (γίνεσθαι v.l.) κ. τὸν τόπον come up to the place (Jos., Vi. 283) Lk 10:32. ἐλθόντες κ. τὴν Μυσίαν to Mysia Ac 16:7; cp. 27:7. πορεύεσθαι κ. μεσημβρίαν (s. μεσημβρία 2) toward the south 8:26 (cp. Jos., Bell. 5, 505). κ. σκοπὸν διώκειν run (over the course) toward the goal Phil 3:14. λιμὴν βλέπων κ. λίβα καὶ κ. χῶρον a harbor open to the southwest and northwest Ac 27:12 (s. βλέπω 8).—κ. πρόσωπον to the face (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 205) Gal 2:11. ἔχειν τινὰ κ. πρόσωπον meet someone face to face (Thieme 19 has reff. for the use of κατὰ πρόσωπον as a legal formula) Ac 25:16. κ. πρόσωπον ταπεινός humble when personally present 2 Cor 10:1. κ. πρόσωπόν τινος in the presence of someone Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13. τὰ κ. πρόσωπον what lies before one’s eyes, i.e. is obvious 2 Cor 10:7. κ. ὀφθαλμοὺς προγράφειν portray before one’s eyes Gal 3:1.
    ⓒ of isolation or separateness, by (Thu. 1, 138, 6 οἱ καθʼ ἑαυτοὺς Ἕλληνες ‘the Greeks by themselves’; Polyb. 1, 24, 4; 5, 78, 3; 11, 17, 6; Diod S 13, 72, 8; Gen 30:40; 43:32; 2 Macc 13:13; Philo, Migr. Abr. 87; 90; Just., D. 4, 5 αὐτὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν γενομένη; Tat. 13, 1 ἡ ψυχὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν; Ath. 15, 2 ὁ πηλὸς καθʼ ἑαυτόν) ἔχειν τι καθʼ ἑαυτόν keep someth. to oneself Ro 14:22 (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 255; Heliod. 7, 16, 1). καθʼ ἑαυτὸν μένειν live by oneself of the private dwelling of Paul in Rome Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρὰ καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 3, 43 τὸ σῶμα καθʼ αὑτὸ νεκρόν ἐστιν). ἡ κατʼ οἶκον ἐκκλησία the congregation in the house Ro 16:5; 1 Cor 16:19. κατʼ ἰδίαν s. ἴδιος 5. κ. μόνας (Thu. 1, 32, 5; Menand., Epitr. 988 S. [658 Kö.], Fgm. 146 Kö. [158 Kock]; Polyb. 4, 15, 11; Diod S 4, 51, 16; BGU 813, 15 [s. APF 2, 1903, 97]; LXX) alone, by oneself Mk 4:10; Lk 9:18; Hm 11:8 (here, as well as BGU loc. cit. and LXX, written as one word καταμόνας).
    ⓓ of places viewed serially, distributive use w. acc., x by x (Arrian., Anab. 4, 21, 10 κ. σκηνήν=tent by tent) or from x to x: κατʼ οἶκον from house to house (PLond III, 904, 20 p. 125 [104 A.D.] ἡ κατʼ οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή) Ac 2:46b; 5:42 (both in ref. to various house assemblies or congregations; w. less probability NRSV ‘at home’); cp. 20:20. Likew. the pl. κ. τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος 8:3. κ. τὰς συναγωγάς 22:19. κ. πόλιν (Jos., Ant. 6, 73) from city to city IRo 9:3, but in every (single) city Ac 15:21; 20:23; Tit 1:5. Also κ. πόλιν πᾶσαν (cp. Herodian 1, 14, 9) Ac 15:36; κ. πᾶσαν πόλιν 20:23 D. κ. πόλιν καὶ κώμην Lk 8:1; cp. vs. 4.
    ② marker of temporal aspect (Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, apolog.)
    ⓐ in definite indications of time: at, on, during (Hdt. 8, 17; Polemon Soph. B 43 Reader κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν ‘in the course of that day’) κατʼ ἀρχάς in the beginning (cp. ἀρχή 1b) Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26). κ. τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ in the day of trial 3:8 (Ps 94:8.—Cp. Antig. Car. 173 κ. τὸν σπόρου καιρόν). νεκροῦ … ἀνάστασιν κατʼ αὐτὸν γεγονυῖαν ἱστορεῖ (Papias) reports that a resurrection from the dead occurred in his time Papias (2, 9; so, with personal names, Hdt.; Just., D. 23, 1 τοῦ θεοῦ … τοῦ κ. τὸν Ἐνώχ; Tat. 31, 2 Θεαγένης … κ. Καμβύσην γεγονώς). Of the future: κ. τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον at that time, then Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10). Of the past: κ. ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρόν at that time, then (2 Macc 3:5; TestJos 12:1; Jos., Ant. 8, 266; cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο τοῦ καιροῦ Konon: 26 Fgm. 3 p. 191, 25 Jac.; Just., A I, 17, 2; 26, 3 al.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. κ. καιρόν at that time, then Ro 5:6 (Just., D. 132, 1; cp. OGI 90, 28 καθʼ ὸ̔ν καιρόν), unless καιρός here means the right time (s. καιρός 1b end). κατʼ ὄναρ (as καθʼ ὕπνον Gen 20:6; Just., D 60, 5 κ. τοὺς ὕπνους) during a dream, in a dream Mt 1:20; 2:12 (s. s.v. ὄναρ for ins).
    ⓑ with indefinite indications of time: toward, about κ. τὸ μεσονύκτιον about midnight Ac 16:25; cp. 27:27.—8:26 (s. μεσημβρία 1).
    ⓒ distributively (cp. 1d): x period by x period: κατʼ ἔτος every year (s. ἔτος) Lk 2:41. Also κατʼ ἐνιαυτόν (s. ἐνιαυτός 1) Hb 9:25; 10:1, 3. καθʼ ἡμέραν daily, every day (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49; Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l. ἡ ἐπίστασις ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἐπίστασις) 2 Cor 11:28. κ. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:7. Also καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Hb 3:13. κ. μίαν σαββάτου on the first day of every week 1 Cor 16:2. κ. πᾶν σάββατον every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21b; 18:4. κ. μῆνα ἕκαστον each month Rv 22:2 (κ. μῆνα as SIG 153, 65; POxy 275, 18; 2 Macc 6:7). κ. ἑορτήν at each festival Mt 27:15; Mk 15:6.
    ③ marker of division of a greater whole into individual parts, at a time, in detail, distributive use apart from indications of place (s. above 1d) and time (s. 2c)
    ⓐ w. numerals: κ. δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς two or, at the most, three at a time (i.e. in any one meeting, cp. ἀνὰ μέρος) 1 Cor 14:27 (Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 42 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς; Jos., Ant. 3, 142 κ. ἕξ; 5, 172 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς). καθʼ ἕνα (on this and the foll. s. εἷς 5e) singly, one after the other vs. 31. κ. ἕνα λίθον each individual stone Hs 9, 3, 5; καθʼ ἕνα λίθον 9, 6, 3. κ. ἓν ἕκαστον one by one, in detail Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1 (Ath. 28, 4 καθʼ ἕκαστον). εἷς καθʼ εἷς Mk 14:19; J 8:9; cp. Ro 12:5 (B-D-F §305; Rob. 460). κ. ἑκατὸν καὶ κ. πεντήκοντα in hundreds and in fifties Mk 6:40.
    ⓑ περί τινος λέγειν κ. μέρος speak of someth. in detail Hb 9:5 (s. μέρος 1c). κατʼ ὄνομα (each one) by name (ἀσπάζομαι … τοὺς ἐνοίκους πάντες κα[τʼ] ὄνομα PTebt [III A.D.] 422, 11–16; Jos., Vi. 86) J 10:3; 3J 15 (cp. BGU 27, 18); ISm 13:2.
    ④ marker of intention or goal, for the purpose of, for, to (Thu. 6, 31, 1 κ. θέαν ἥκειν=to look at something; cp. Sb 7263, 6 [254 B.C.]; X., An. 3, 5, 2 καθʼ ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι; Arrian, Anab. 1, 17, 12; 4, 5, 1; 21, 9; 6, 17, 6; 26, 2; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 2, 29; Anton. Lib., Fab. 24, 1 Δημήτηρ ἐπῄει γῆν ἅπασαν κ. ζήτησιν τῆς θυγατρός; 38; Jdth 11:19) κ. τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν Ἰουδαίων for the Jewish ceremonial purification J 2:6. κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω to my shame 2 Cor 11:21 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 268 κ. τιμὴν τ. θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν). ἀπόστολος … κ. πίστιν … καὶ ἐπίγνωσιν an apostle … for the faith … and the knowledge Tit 1:1 (but the mng. ‘in accordance with’ is also prob.).
    ⑤ marker of norm of similarity or homogeneity, according to, in accordance with, in conformity with, according to
    ⓐ to introduce the norm which governs someth.
    α. the norm of the law, etc. (OGI 56, 33; Mitt-Wilck., I/2, 352, 11 κ. τὰ κελευσθέντα [as Just., D. 78, 7]; POxy 37 II, 8) κ. τὸν νόμον (Jos., Ant. 14, 173; 15, 51; Just., D. 10, 1 al.; Ath. 31, 1; κ. τοὺς νόμους Ἀρεοπαγείτης, letter of MAurelius: ZPE 8, ’71, 169, ln. 27) Lk 2:22; J 18:31; 19:7; Hb 7:5. τὰ κ. τ. νόμον what is to be done according to the law Lk 2:39 (cp. EpArist 32). κ. τὸ ὡρισμένον in accordance w. what has been determined 22:22. Cp. 1:9; 2:24, 27, 42; Ac 17:2; 22:3. κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου Ro 2:16; 16:25a; 2 Ti 2:8. κ. τὸ εἰρημένον Ro 4:18 (cp. Ath. 28, 1 κ. τὰ προειρημένα). κ. τὰς γραφάς (Just., D. 82, 4; cp. Paus. 6, 21, 10 κ. τὰ ἔπη=according to the epic poems; Just., A I, 32, 14 κ. τὸ λόγιον, D. 67, 1 κ. τὴν προφητείαν ταύτην) 1 Cor 15:3; cp. Js 2:8. κ. τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:5 (Tat. 39, 1 κ. τὴν Ἑλλήνων παράδοσιν).—κ. λόγον as one wishes (exx. in Dssm., B 209 [not in BS]; also PEleph 13, 1; 3 Macc 3:14) Ac 18:14 (though 5bβ below is also prob.).—It can also stand simply w. the acc. of the pers. according to whose will, pleasure, or manner someth. occurs κ. θεόν (cp. Socrat., Ep. 14, 5 κ. θεόν; 26, 2; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 1 Jac. and Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 84 §352 κ. δαίμονα; Jos., Ant. 4, 143 ὁ κ. τοῦτον[=θεόν] βίος; Just., D. 5, 1 κ. τινας … Πλατωνικούς; Tat. 1, 3 κ. … τὸν κωμικόν) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9–11; κ. Χριστὸν Ἰ. Ro 15:5. κ. κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. Cp. 1 Pt 1:15. κ. τ. Ἕλληνας in the manner of the Greeks, i.e. polytheists PtK 2, p. 14, 1; 7. κ. Ἰουδαίους ln. 25.
    β. the norm according to which a judgment is rendered, or rewards or punishments are given ἀποδοῦναι τινι κ. τ. πρᾶξιν or ἔργα αὐτοῦ (Ps 61:13; Pr 24:12; Just., A I, 12, 1; 17, 4 al.; κατʼ ἀξίαν τῶν πράξεων) Mt 16:27; Ro 2:6; 2 Ti 4:14; Rv 2:23. μισθὸν λήμψεται κ. τ. ἴδιον κόπον 1 Cor 3:8. κρίνειν κ. τι J 7:24; 8:15; 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Ro 2:2.
    γ. of a standard of any other kind κ. τ. χρόνον ὸ̔ν ἠκρίβωσεν in accordance w. the time which he had ascertained Mt 2:16. κ. τ. πίστιν ὑμῶν acc. to your faith 9:29. κ. τ. δύναμιν acc. to his capability 25:15 (Just., D. 139, 4; Tat. 12, 3; cp. Just., A II, 13, 6 κ. δύναμιν). Cp. Lk 1:38; 2:29; Ro 8:4; 10:2; Eph 4:7. ἀνὴρ κ. τ. καρδίαν μου Ac 13:22 (καρδία 1bε).
    δ. Oft. the norm is at the same time the reason, so that in accordance with and because of are merged: οἱ κ. πρόθεσιν κλητοί Ro 8:28. κατʼ ἐπιταγὴν θεοῦ 16:26; 1 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Eph 3:3 (Just., D. 78, 2). οἱ καθʼ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ Ro 2:7. κατʼ ἐκλογήν 11:5 (Just., D. 49, 1). Cp. κ. τὴν βουλήν Eph 1:11 (Just., A I, 63, 16 al.); 2 Th 2:9; Hb 7:16. κ. τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what shall I know this? (cp. Gen 15:8) Lk 1:18.—Instead of ‘in accordance w.’ κ. can mean simply because of, as a result of, on the basis of (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 219 D.: κ. τοὺς νόμους; Jos., Ant. 1, 259; 278; Just., A I, 54, 1 κατʼ ἐνέργειαν τῶν φαύλων δαιμόνων; Ath. 7, 1 κ. συμπάθειαν τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ πνοῆς; 32, 1 κ. χρησμόν). κ. πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any and every reason (αἰτία 1) Mt 19:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Gal 2:2. Cp. Ro 2:5; 1 Cor 12:8 (κ. τ. πνεῦμα = διὰ τοῦ πν.); Eph 1:5; 4:22b; Phil 4:11; 1 Ti 5:21; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 3:5; κ. ἀνάγκην Phlm 14 (Ar. 1, 2; 4, 2 al.; Just., A I, 30, 1; 61, 10; Ath. 24, 2); IPol 1:3. ὁ κ. τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 Pt 1:3.—καθʼ ὅσον (Thu. 4, 18, 4) in so far as, inasmuch as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κ. τοσοῦτο in so far as …, just so far (Lysias 31, 8; Galen, De Dignosc. Puls. 3, 2, VIII 892 K.) 7:20, 22.
    ⓑ as a periphrasis to express equality, similarity, or example in accordance with, just as, similar(ly) to (TestJob 32:6 τίς γὰρ κ. σε ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου; Tat. 25, 1 κ. … τὸν Πρωτέα like Proteus; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 50: sheep are not burden-bearers κ. τοὺς ὄνους=as donkeys are).
    α. κ. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε do not do as they do Mt 23:3. κ. Ἰσαάκ just as Isaac Gal 4:28. κ. θεὸν κτισθείς Eph 4:24 (Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118c κ. θεόν=just as a god). Cp. Col 3:10. κ. τὸν τύπον Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40; Mel., P. 58, 424 [νόμον v.l.]). Cp. 5:6 (Ps 109:4); 8:9 (Jer 38: 32); Js 3:9.—κ. τὰ αὐτά in (just) the same way (OGI 56, 66; PEleph 2, 6; 1 Macc 8:27; 12:2; Just., D. 1, 2; 3, 5; 113, 3) Lk 6:23, 26; 17:30; Dg 3:1. On the other hand, the sing. κ. τὸ αὐτό Ac 14:1 means together (marriage contract PEleph 1, 5 [IV B.C.] εἶναι ἡμᾶς κ. ταὐτό; 1 Km 11:11). καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον just as (2 Macc 6:20; 4 Macc 14:17) Ac 15:11; 27:25. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως (just) as …, so Hb 9:27. κ. πάντα τρόπον in every way (PSI 520, 16 [250 B.C.]; PCairZen 631, 2; 3 Macc 3:24) Ro 3:2. κ. μηδένα τρόπον (PMagd 14, 9 [221 B.C.]; PRein 7, 31; 3 Macc 4:13; 4 Macc 4:24; Just., D. 35, 7; s. Reader, Polemo 262) 2 Th 2:3. Cp. Johannessohn, Kasus, 1910, 82. κατά w. acc. serves in general
    β. to indicate the nature, kind, peculiarity or characteristics of a thing (freq. as a periphrasis for the adv.; e.g. Antiochus of Syracuse [V B.C.]: 555 Fgm. 12 Jac. κ. μῖσος=out of hate, filled with hate) κατʼ ἐξουσίαν with authority or power Mk 1:27. κ. συγκυρίαν by chance Lk 10:31. κ. ἄγνοιαν without knowing Ac 3:17 (s. ἄγνοια 2a). κ. ἄνθρωπον 1 Cor 3:3 al. (s. Straub 15; Aeschyl., Th. 425; ἄνθρωπος 2b). κ. κράτος powerfully, Ac 19:20 (κράτος 1a). κ. λόγον reasonably, rightly (Pla.; Polyb. 1, 62, 4; 5; 5, 110, 10; Jos., Ant. 13, 195; PYale 42, 24 [12 Jan., 229 B.C.]) 18:14 (but s. above 5aα). λέγειν τι κ. συγγνώμην οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν say someth. as a concession, not as a command 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. κ. τάξιν in (an) order(ly manner) 1 Cor 14:40 (τάξις 2). κατʼ ὀφθαλμοδουλίαν with eye-service Eph 6:6. μηδὲν κατʼ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κ. κενοδοξίαν Phil 2:3. κ. ζῆλος zealously 3:6a, unless this pass. belongs under 6 below, in its entirety. κ. σάρκα on the physical plane Ro 8:12f; 2 Cor 1:17; also 5:16ab, if here κ. ς. belongs w. οἴδαμεν or ἐγνώκαμεν (as Bachmann, JWeiss, H-D Wendland, Sickenberger take it; s. 7a below). καθʼ ὑπερβολήν (PTebt 42, 5f [c. 114 B.C.] ἠδικημένος καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὸ, Ἁρμιύσιος; 4 Macc 3:18) beyond measure, beyond comparison Ro 7:13; 1 Cor 12:31; 2 Cor 4:17. καθʼ ὁμοιότητα (Aristot.; Gen 1:12; Philo, Fug. 51; Tat. 12, 4 κ. τὸ ὅμοιον αὐτῇ) in a similar manner Hb 4:15b. κ. μικρόν in brief B 1:5 (μικρός 1eγ).
    ⑥ denoting relationship to someth., with respect to, in relation to κ. σάρκα w. respect to the flesh, physically of human descent Ro 1:3; 4:1; 9:3, 5 (Ar. 15, 7 κ. σάρκα … κ. ψυχήν; Just., D. 43, 7 ἐν τῷ γένει τῷ κ. σάρκα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ al.). κ. τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 7:22 (cp. POxy 904, 6 πληγαῖς κατακοπτόμενον κ. τὸ σῶμα). Cp. Ro 1:4; 11:28; Phil 3:5, 6b (for vs. 6a s. 5bβ above); Hb 9:9b. τὰ κ. τινα (Hdt. 7, 148; Diod S 1, 10, 73; Aelian, VH 2, 20; PEleph 13, 3; POxy 120, 14; Tob 10:9; 1 Esdr 9:17; 2 Macc 3:40; 9:3 al.) someone’s case, circumstances Ac 24:22 (cp. PEleph 13, 3 τὰ κ. σε; Just., A I, 61, 13 τὰ κ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν πάντα, D. 102, 2 τὰ κ. αὐτόν; Ath. 24, 4 τὸ κ. τοὺς ἀγγέλους); 25:14; Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. κ. πάντα in all respects (since Thu. 4, 81, 3; Sb 4324, 3; 5761, 22; SIG 834, 7; Gen 24:1; Wsd 19:22; 2 Macc 1:17; 3 Macc 5:42; JosAs 1:7; Just., A II, 4, 4, D. 35, 8 al.); Ac 17:22; Col 3:20, 22a; Hb 2:17 (Artem. 1, 13 αὐτῷ ὅμοιον κ. π.); 4:15a.
    ⑦ Somet. the κατά phrase, which would sound cumbersome in the rendering ‘such-and-such’, ‘in line with’, or ‘in accordance with’, is best rendered as an adj., a possessive pron., or with a genitival construction to express the perspective from which something is perceived or to be understood. In translation it thus functions as
    ⓐ an adj. (Synes., Kingdom 4 p. 4d τὰ κατʼ ἀρετὴν ἔργα i.e. the deeds that are commensurate with that which is exceptional = virtuous deeds; PHib 27, 42 ταῖς κ. σελήνην ἡμέραις; 4 Macc 5:18 κ. ἀλήθειαν=ἀληθής; Just., A I, 2, 1 τοὺς κ. ἀλήθειαν εὐσεβεῖς; Tat. 26, 2 τῆς κ. ἀλήθειαν σοφίας) οἱ κ. φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21. ἡ κατʼ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Tit 1:1b. οἱ κ. σάρκα κύριοι the earthly masters (in wordplay, anticipating the κύριος who is in the heavens, vs. 9) Eph 6:5. Cp. 2 Cor 5:16b, in case (s. 5bβ above) κ. ς. belongs w. Χριστόν (as the majority, incl. Ltzm., take it): a physical Christ, a Christ in the flesh, in his earthly relationships (σάρξ 5). Correspondingly in vs. 16a κ. ς. would be taken w. οὐδένα: no one simply as a physical being.—JMartyn, JKnox Festschr., ’67, 269–87.
    ⓑ a possessive pron., but with limiting force (Demosth. 2, 27 τὰ καθʼ ὑμᾶς ἐλλείμματα [i.e. in contrast to the activities of others: ‘your own’]; Aelian, VH 2, 42 ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ἀρετή; 3, 36; OGI 168, 17 παραγεγονότες εἰς τοὺς καθʼ ὑμᾶς τόπους; SIG 646, 6; 807, 15 al.; UPZ 20, 9 [II B.C.] ἐπὶ τῆς καθʼ ἡμᾶς λειτουργίας; PTebt 24, 64; 2 Macc 4:21; Tat. 42, 1 τίς ὁ θεὸς καὶ τίς ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ποίησις; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7 ἡ καθʼ ἡμᾶς φιλοσοφία) τῶν καθʼ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν τινες some of your (own) poets Ac 17:28. ἡ καθʼ ὑμᾶς πίστις Eph 1:15. ὁ καθʼ ὑμᾶς νόμος Ac 18:15. τὸ κατʼ ἐμὲ πρόθυμον my eagerness Ro 1:15.
    ⓒ a gen. w. a noun (Polyb. 3, 113, 1 ἡ κ. τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατολή; 2, 48, 2; 3, 8, 1 al.; Diod S 14, 12 ἡ κ. τὸν τύραννον ὠμότης; Dionys. Hal. 2, 1; SIG 873, 5 τῆς κ. τ. μυστήρια τελετῆς; 569, 22; 783, 20; PTebt 5, 25; PLond III, 1164k, 20 p. 167 [212 A.D.] ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. πατέρα μου ἀνεψιοῦ) τὰ κ. Ἰουδαίους ἔθη the customs of the Judeans Ac 26:3 (Tat. 12, 5 τῇ κ. Βαβυλωνίους προγνωστικῇ; 34, 2 ἡ κ. τὸν Ἀριστόδημον πλαστική). Cp. 27:2. ἡ κ. πίστιν δικαιοσύνη the righteousness of faith Hb 11:7. ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις purpose of election Ro 9:11.—Here also belong the titles of the gospels εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Ματθαῖον etc., where κατά is likew. periphrasis for a gen. (cp. JLydus, De Mag. 3, 46 p. 136, 10 Wünsch τῆς κ. Λουκανὸν συγγραφῆς; Herodian 2, 9, 4 of an autobiography ἐν τῷ καθʼ αὑτὸν βίῳ; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 18 τ. καθʼ αὐτὸν ἱστορίαν; 2 Macc 2:13. Cp. B-D-F §163; 224, 2; Zahn, Einleitung §49; BBacon, Why ‘According to Mt’? Exp., 8th ser., 16, 1920, 289–310).—On the periphrasis of the gen. by κατά s. Rudberg (ἀνά beg.) w. many exx. fr. Pla. on. But it occurs as early as Thu. 6, 16, 5 ἐν τῷ κατʼ αὐτοὺς βίῳ.—M-M. DELG. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κατά

  • 13 παρακαλέω

    παρακαλέω impf. παρεκάλουν; fut. παρακαλέσω LXX; 1 aor. παρεκάλεσα. Pass.: 1 fut. παρακληθήσομαι; 1 aor. παρεκλήθην; pf. παρακέκλημαι (Aeschyl., Hdt.+).
    ① to ask to come and be present where the speaker is, call to one’s side
    ⓐ τινά w. inf. foll., to indicate the purpose of the call; so perh. παρεκάλεσα ὑμᾶς ἰδεῖν I have summoned you to see you Ac 28:20 (but s. 3 below).
    ⓑ invite τινά someone w. inf. foll. (this can be supplied fr. context) παρεκάλει αὐτὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὸν οἶκον Lk 8:41. παρεκάλει αὐτόν (i.e. εἰσελθεῖν) 15:28 (but s. 5 below). παρεκάλεσεν τὸν Φίλιππον καθίσαι Ac 8:31 (cp. Jos., Ant. 12, 172). The content of the invitation follows in direct discourse 9:38; introduced by λέγουσα 16:15. Cp. ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις ἦν παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν καὶ λέγων … βοήθησον ἡμῖν vs. 9. Pass., w. inf. foll. παρακληθέντες δειπνῆσαι when you are invited to dine Mt 20:28 D.—Some of the passages in 5 may fit here.
    ⓒ summon to one’s aid, call upon for help (Hdt. et al.) so esp. of God, upon whom one calls in time of need (Thu. 1, 118, 3; Pla., Leg. 2, 666b; 11 p. 917b; X., Hell. 2, 4, 17; Epict. 3, 21, 12; Jos., Ant. 6, 25; SIG 1170, 30f in an account of a healing: περὶ τούτου παρεκάλεσα τὸν θεόν. POxy 1070, 8f [III A.D.] τὸν μέγαν θεὸν Σάραπιν παρακαλῶ περὶ τῆς ζωῆς ὑμῶν; cp. the restoration in the pap letter of Zoilus, servant of Sarapis, in Dssm., LO 121, 11 [LAE 153, 4; the letter, ln. 8: ἐμοῦ δ̣ὲ̣ π[α]ρ̣[ακαλέσαντος τὸν θεὸν Σάραπιν]) τινά: τὸν πατέρα μου Mt 26:53. ὑπὲρ τούτου τὸν κύριον παρεκάλεσα, ἵνα 2 Cor 12:8. θεὸς … παρακαλούμενος ἀκούει God heeds, when called upon AcPt Ox 849, 27.
    ② to urge strongly, appeal to, urge, exhort, encourage (X. et al.; LXX) w. acc. of pers. Ac 16:40; 2 Cor 10:1; 1 Th 2:12 (but s. 5 below); 5:11; Hb 3:13; ITr 12:2; IRo 7:2. The acc. is found in the immediate context Ac 20:1; 1 Ti 5:1 (but s. 5 below). Pass. 1 Cor 14:31. τινὰ λόγῳ πολλῷ someone with many words Ac 20:2; also τινὰ διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ 15:32. τινὰ διʼ ὀλίγων γραμμάτων IPol 7:3. W. acc. of pers. and direct discourse 1 Cor 4:16; 1 Th 5:14; Hb 13:22; 1 Pt 5:1; direct discourse introduced by λέγων (B-D-F §420) Ac 2:40. W. acc. of pers. and inf. foll. (SIG 695, 43 [129 B.C.]) 11:23; 27:33f; Ro 12:1 (EKäsemann, Gottesdienst im Alltag, ’60 [Beih. ZNW], 165–71); 15:30; 16:17; 2 Cor 2:8; 6:1; Eph 4:1; Phil 4:2; Tit 2:6; 1 Pt 2:11 (cp. Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36 II, 4 Jac. p. 1172, 19; ELohse, ZNW 45, ’54, 68–89); Jd 3 (the acc. is found in the immediate context, as Philo, Poster Cai. 138); ITr 6:1; IPhld 8:2; IPol 1:2a; Pol 9:1 al. W. inf. (acc. in the context), continued by καὶ ὅτι (s. B-D-F §397, 6; Rob. 1047) Ac 14:22. W. acc. of pers. and ἵνα foll. (PRyl 229, 17 [38 A.D.]; EpArist 318; Jos., Ant. 14, 168.—B-D-F §392, 1c; Rob. 1046) 1 Cor 1:10; 16:15f; 2 Cor 8:6; 1 Th 4:1 (π. w. ἐρωτάω as BGU 1141, 10; POxy 294, 29) 2 Th 3:12; Hm 12, 3, 2; AcPl Ha 7, 32. The ἵνα-clause expresses not the content of the appeal, as in the pass. referred to above, but its aim: πάντας παρακαλεῖν, ἵνα σῴζωνται IPol 1:2b.—Without acc. of pers.: w. direct discourse foll. ὡς τοῦ θεοῦ παρακαλοῦντος διʼ ἡμῶν• δεόμεθα since God as it were makes his appeal through us: ‘We beg’ 2 Cor 5:20. Paul serves as God’s agent (like a ‘legate of Caesar’ Dssm. LO 320 [LAE 374]) and functions as mediator (like Alexander the Great, Plut., Mor. 329c διαλλακτής; cp. also the mediatorial role of a judge IPriene 53, esp. 10f; s. also CBreytenbach, Versöhnung ’89, 64–66). W. inf. foll. 1 Ti 2:1. Abs. Ro 12:8 (mng. 4 is also poss.); 2 Ti 4:2; Tit 1:9; Hb 10:25; 1 Pt 5:12 (w. ἐπιμαρτυρεῖν); B 19:10.—W. acc. of thing impress upon someone, urge, exhort πολλὰ ἕτερα Lk 3:18. ταῦτα δίδασκε καὶ παρακάλει 1 Ti 6:2. ταῦτα λάλει καὶ παρακάλει καὶ ἔλεγχε Tit 2:15. In the case of several of the passages dealt with in this section, it is poss. that they could as well be classed under
    ③ to make a strong request for someth., request, implore, entreat (H. Gk.: Polyb., Diod S, Epict., Plut., ins, pap, LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 6, 143; 11, 338) w. acc. of pers. Mt 8:5; 18:32; Mk 1:40; 2 Cor 12:18. πολλά implore urgently (4 Macc 10:1) Mk 5:23. τινὰ περί τινος someone concerning someone or for someone Phlm 10 (for the constr. w. περί cp. POxy 1070, 8). Acc. w. direct discourse foll. (s. BGU 846, 10 παρακαλῶ σαι [= σε], μήτηρ• διαλλάγηθί μοι; PGiss 12, 4; ParJer 1:4 al.), introduced w. λέγων: Mt 8:31; 18:29; Mk 5:12; Lk 7:4 (v.l. ἠρώτων). W. acc. of pers. and inf. foll. (PTebt 12, 21 [II B.C.]; 1 Macc 9:35; Jos., Ant. 6, 25) Mk 5:17; cp. Ac 19:31. Pass. Ac 28:14. W. acc. of pers. (easily supplied fr. the context, if not expressed) and ὅπως foll. (Plut., Demetr. 907 [38, 11]; SIG 563, 4; 577, 44f [200/199 B.C.]; UPZ 109, 9 [98 B.C.]; PFlor 303, 3; 4 Macc 4:11; Jos., Ant. 13, 76) Mt 8:34 (v.l. ἵνα); Ac 25:2; IEph 3:2. W. acc. of pers. and ἵνα foll. (Epict. 2, 7, 11; PRyl 229, 17; EpArist 318.—B-D-F §392, 1c; Rob. 1046) Mt 14:36; Mk 5:18; 6:56; 7:32; 8:22; Lk 8:31f; 2 Cor 9:5. πολλά τινα, ἵνα beg someone earnestly to (cp. TestNapht 9:1) Mk 5:10; 1 Cor 16:12. W. acc. of pers. and μή w. subj. foll. IRo 4:1. W. acc. and inf. foll. Ac 24:4; pass. 13:42 (Just., D. 58, 1). Foll. by subst. inf. w. acc. (B-D-F §400, 7; 409, 5; Rob. 1068; 1085) 21:12. παρεκάλεσα ὑμᾶς ἰδεῖν I have requested to be permitted to see you 28:20 (but s. 1a above). Abs., but in such a way that the acc. is easily restored fr. the context Phlm 9 (ParJer 9:4; Just., D. 46, 2; 74, 2 [always παρακαλῶ ‘please’]; cp. New Docs 8 p. 24 ln. 7 [I B.C.]).
    ④ to instill someone with courage or cheer, comfort, encourage, cheer up (Plut., Otho 1074 [16, 2]; Gen 37:35; Ps 118:50; Job 4:3) w. acc. of pers. (Sir 48:24; Jos., Bell. 1, 667; TestReub 4:4) 2 Cor 1:4b; 7:6a; 1 Cl 59:4; B 14:9 (Is 61:2); Hm 8:10. παρακαλεῖν τινα ἔν τινι comfort someone with someth. 2 Cor 7:6b. π. τινα ἐπί τινι comfort someone w. regard to someth. 1:4a. π. τινα ὑπέρ τινος encourage someone in someth. 1 Th 3:2. παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις comfort one another w. these words 4:18.—Pass. be comforted, receive comfort through words, or a favorable change in the situation Mt 5:4; Lk 16:25; Ac 20:12; 2 Cor 1:6; 7:13; 13:11; let oneself be comforted Mt 2:18 (Jer 38:15 v.l.). παρεκλήθημεν ἐφʼ ὑμῖν we have been comforted concerning you 1 Th 3:7. ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ παρεκλήθη ἐφʼ ὑμῖν 2 Cor 7:7. διά τῆς παρακλήσεως, ἧς (on attraction, for ᾗ, s. B-D-F §294, 2; Rob. 716) παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοί by the comfort with which we ourselves are comforted 1:4c.—W. acc. of thing τὰς καρδίας Eph 6:22; Col 4:8; 2 Th 2:17; pass. Col 2:2.—Abs. 2 Cor 2:7; Ro 12:8 (but s. 2 above). παρακαλεῖν ἐν τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ encourage (others) with the teaching Tit 1:9.—ἐλθόντες παραεκάλεσαν αὐτούς (the officials) came and reassured them Ac 16:39 (s. 5 below).
    ⑤ In several places παρ. appears to mean simply treat someone in an inviting or congenial manner, someth. like our ‘be open to the other, have an open door’: invite in, conciliate, be friendly to or speak to in a friendly manner (cp. 2 Macc 13:23; Ar. 15, 5 [χριστιανοὶ] τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας αὐτοὺς παρακαλοῦσιν) Lk 15:28 (but s. 1b: the father tries repeatedly [impf.] to get the son to join the party); Ac 16:39 (the officials are conciliatory, but ‘apologize to’ may be overinterpretation; s. 4); 1 Cor 4:13 (somewhat like our ‘keep the door open’); 1 Th 2:12; 1 Ti 5:1. These last three pass. may also fit in 1b.—CBjerkelund, Parakalō ’67.—M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > παρακαλέω

  • 14 עבר

    עָבַר(b. h.) 1) to be thick, swell; to run over. Par. VI, 4 כדי שיַעַבְרוּ המיםוכ׳ that the water may overflow into a vessel; a. e.Ex. R. s. 15 שאני עוֹבֵר, v. עֶבְרָה. 2) (cmp. סְגֵי I a. II) to pass, to cross. Tosef.Sot.VIII, 1; Sot.33b כיצד עָבְרוּ ישראל אתוכ׳ in what manner did the Israelites cross the Jordan? Cant. R. to V, 13 עוֹבֵר הוא וחוזרוכ׳ he goes over his studies once and again ; a. fr.ע׳ את הדין to cross the line of justice, to be too severe. Midd. II, 2 כאילו עברו עליווכ׳ as if they had treated him too severely (arbitrarily). Ex. R. s. 30 כשם שאני יכול לַעֲבוֹר … ואני איני מַעֲבִירוכ׳ as I (the Lord) have power to treat the nations with rigor, but refrain from doing so, so shall you not go beyond the line of justice. Ib. עִיבְּרָה את הדין (Pi.); a. e. 3) (with על) to pass over (a sin); to forgive. Cant. R. to V, 5 (play on מור עובר, ib.) מר עובר ע׳ על מררי the bitterness passes away, he (the Lord) passes over my bitterness (sin). R. Hash. 17a (ref. To Mic. 7:18) למי נושא עון למי שעובר על פשע whose iniquity does he pardon? the iniquity of him who forgives (his neighbors) transgression; a. e. 4) to transgress, sin. Yoma 86b, a. e. כיון שע׳ אדם עבירה ושנהוכ׳ as soon as a man has committed a sin and repeated it, it becomes to him a permitted act. Ib. a, a. e. ע׳ על עשה when one has transgressed a positive law (committed a sin of omission). Ib. ע׳ על כריתותוכ׳ when one has committed sins punishable with extinction or death by a court. Erub.100a, a. fr. עובר על בלוכ׳, v. בַּל. Keth.VII, 6 העוֹבֶרֶת על דתוכ׳ if a wife offends against Mosaic or Jewish customs, v. דַּת; Y. ib. VII, 31c top נשים המְעַבְּרוֹת על הדת (Pi.); a. v. fr. 5) to pass, overtake, precede. Pes.7b כל המצות מברך עליהן עובר לעשייתן in the performance of all religious ceremonies one must say the benediction over them before doing them; מאי משמע דהאי עובר לישנא דאקדומי היא what evidence is there that this ‘ober has the meaning of precedence? Answ. by ref. to ויעבר (2 Sam. 18:23) ‘and he arrived before the Cushite. 6) to pass by, go away, be removed. Pes.III, 1 אלו עוֹבְרִין בפסח the following things must pass away (their use must be suspended) during Passover. Bets.26a, a. fr. מום עובר a transitory blemish, opp. קבוע. Ber.26a ע׳ יומו בטל קרבנו when its day is passed, the sacrifice of the day is void. Pes.II, 2 חמץ … שע׳ עליו הפסח leavened matter … over which Passover has passed (which had been in the house during Passover). Ber.IX, 3 הצועק לַשֶּׁעָבַרוכ׳ praying for what is passed (decided) is a vain prayer, e. g. if ones wife is with child, and one prays, may it be the will of God that my wife bear a male child; Y.Taan.II, 65c bot. נותן הודייה לשעבר וצועקוכ׳ one gives thanks for what is passed, and prays for what is to come. Gitt.VII, 7 כל זמן שאֱעֶבוֹר מכנגד פניךוכ׳ as soon as I shall have been out of thy sight for thirty days; Tosef. ib. VII (V), 10. Keth.17a ע׳ מלפני כלה he passed aside to make room for a bridal procession. Yoma 66a, a. e. חטאת שעָבְרָה שנתה a sin-offering whose year is passed (that is older than one year); Tem.22a שעִיבְּרָה שנתה (Pi.) whose year is completed (v. infra). Ib. 21b בכור שעברה שנתו a first-born animal older than one year; R. Hash. 5b; Zeb.29a bot. שעיברה; Tosef.Snh.III, 6 בכור שעיברה זמנו ed. Zuck. (read with Var.: שעבר). Keth.87a על שֶׁעָ׳ as regards the past, v. עָתִיד; a. v. fr.לַשֶּׁעָ׳ in former days. Gen. R. s. 47, opp. עַכְשָׁיו; a. fr. Hif. חֶעֱבִיר 1) to lead past, stroke gently. Tosef.Sabb.VII (VIII), 23 (read:) מַעֲבִירִין על גבי העין בשבת you are permitted to stroke a sore eye on the Sabbath; Y. ib. XIV, 14c bot. מעבירין על העין. Ib. הֶעֱבִירוּ עליו כלים they passed garments over it. 2) to cause to pass; to remove, displace. Keth.17a מַעֲבִירִין את המת מלפני כלהוכ׳ a funeral procession is made to make way for a bridal procession, and both of them for the king, v. supra. Gitt.57b שאין אנו מעבירין אותו באל אחר that we shall never displace him for another god; שאין מַעֲבִיר אותנווכ׳ that he will never displace us for another nation. Ex. R. s. 30 כאילו היא מעביר איקיניןוכ׳ as if he removed (defaced) the kings portrait; a. fr. 3) to go beyond. Ib. איני מעבירוכ׳, v. supra. Ib. הבריות מעבירין על הדיןוכ׳ men go beyond the line of justice (are treacherous, cruel), and they are punished; a. e. 4) to skip over; to forego, postpone.ה׳ על מדותיו, v. מִדָּה.Yoma 33a; 58b, a. fr. אין מעבירין על המצות you must not forego the occasion for performing a religious act. Erub.64b אין מעבירין על האוכלין you must not pass by eatables (and let them lie in the street); B. Mets.23a; a. fr. 5) to forego, overlook, pardon. R. Hash. 17a (ref. to Mic. 7:18) מעביר ראשון ראשין וכך היא המדה (Ms. M. על ראשוןוכ׳; v. Rabb. D. S. a. l. note) he pardons one sin after the other (before they are put on the scale), and such is the divine dealing. Ib. מעבירין לו על כל פשעיו all his transgressions are pardoned; a. fr. 6) to cause to forego or disregard. Erub.41b שלשה דברים מעבירין … עלוכ׳ three things make a man disregard his own sense (of right) and the sense of his Maker; a. e. Pi. עִיבֵּר 1) to be completed, full. Tem.22a, a. e., v. supra. 2) to transgress repeatedly. Y.Keth.VII, 31c top, v. supra. 3) to go beyond. Ex. R. l. c. עיברה את הדין, v. supra. Tosef.B. Kam. VI, 22 שעיברה הדליקה עד, read with Y. ib. VII, 5c. שעברה … את. 4) (v. עוּבָּר) to carry, be with young. Kidd.31b כי עִבַּרְתּוֹ אמווכ׳ while his mother was pregnant with him, his father died. Tosef.B. Kam. X, 1 ועִיבְּרָה אצלו (B. Kam.IX, 1 ונִתְעַבְּרָה) and the cow became pregnant while she was in his possession. Ḥull.58a; a. fr.Part. pass. f. מְעוּבֶּרֶת; pl. מְעוּבָּרוֹת pregnant. Yeb.XVI, 1. Ib. 36b, a. e. מע׳ חבירו a woman who is with child of another man (divorced or widowed during pregnancy). Gen. R. s. 85 מלכים אני מע׳ גיאלים אני מע׳ I am pregnant with kings, with redeemers (kings and redeemers are destined to be of my offspring). Yeb.III, 10; a. fr. 4) (v. עִיבּוּר) to extend the city limits, for the purpose of defining Sabbath distances, in cases of buildings projecting beyond the city lines (outskirts). Erub.V, 1 כיצד מְעַבְּרִיןוכ׳ (v. אָבַר), defined ib. 53a; Y. ib. V, beg.22b; Y.Ber.VII, 12c top כאשה עוברה like a pregnant woman; Tosef. ib. VI (V), 1; a. e. 6) to complement, add to, esp. to intercalate a month, (second Adar); proclaim a leap year; to complement a month (v. מָלֵא) by assigning to it an additional day (thirty days). Tosef.Snh.II, 1 שנים אומרים צריכה לְעַבֵּר if two judges say, it is necessary to intercalate a month. Ib. 2 על שלשה סימנים מעבריןוכ׳ on three indications the intercalation is decided; על שנים מעבריןוכ׳ when two of them exist, the intercalation is decreed. Ib. ואם עִיבְּרוּהָ הרי זו מעוברת but if they proclaimed it a leap-year, it remains a leap-year; a. fr.Part. pass. מְעוּבָּר; f. מְעוּבֶּרֶת. R. Hash. 19b אלול מע׳ an Elul of thirty days. Snh.11b אינה מע׳ the year is not a leap-year (the declared intercalation is invalid); a. fr. Hithpa. הִתְעַבֵּר, Nithpa. נִתְעַבֵּר 1) to swell (with anger), to become wroth. Sifré Num. 135 (expl. ויתעבר, Deut. 3:26) כאדם שאומר נ׳ בי פלוני נתמלאוכ׳ as a man says, that man (became full) got wroth with me, meaning, he was filled with wrath against me; Yalk. Deut. 818; Sifré Deut. 29 כאשה שאינה יכולה לשוח מפני עוברה ( swelled,) like a woman that cannot bend down on account of the child she is pregnant with; v. עֶבְרָה. 2) to become pregnant. Gen. R. s. 45 מביאה … נִתְעַבְּרָה she conceived on her first intercourse; אין אשה מִתְעַבֶּרֶתוכ׳ no woman conceives on ; Yeb.34a. Ib. b כדי שלא תִתְעַבֵּרוכ׳ that she may not become with child, and her beauty, v. כָּחַש. B. Kam.IX, 1 ונתעברה אצלו, v. supra; a. fr. 3) to be extended, to be consolidated into one township. Y.Erub.V, 22b bot. יכול אני … בית מעון מתעברתוכ׳ I can cause Beth Ma‘on and Tiberias to be considered one township (as regards Sabbath distances). 4) to be added to, to be proclaimed a full month (of thirty days), a leap-year (of thirteen months). Y.R. Hash. III, beg. 58c ניסן לא נ׳ מימיו Nisan was never made a full month (by decree of the court); Y.Shebi.X, beg.39b; a. e.Snh.12a ראויה … שתִּתְעַבֵּר that year ought to have been a leap-year. B. Mets. נִתְעַבְּרָה השנה נתע׳ לשוכר if the year was made a leap-year, the tenant (that rented by the year) reaps the benefit of the intercalation. R. Hash. 19b; a. fr. Nif. נֶעֱבַר (with עֲבֵרָה) to be committed. Tosef.B. Kam. X, 3 בהמה ונֶעֶבְרָה בה עבירה if one stole a beast, and some sinful act was committed on it (by which it became forbidden for any benefit); (B. Kam.IX, 2, a. fr. נעבדה … עבירה).

    Jewish literature > עבר

  • 15 עָבַר

    עָבַר(b. h.) 1) to be thick, swell; to run over. Par. VI, 4 כדי שיַעַבְרוּ המיםוכ׳ that the water may overflow into a vessel; a. e.Ex. R. s. 15 שאני עוֹבֵר, v. עֶבְרָה. 2) (cmp. סְגֵי I a. II) to pass, to cross. Tosef.Sot.VIII, 1; Sot.33b כיצד עָבְרוּ ישראל אתוכ׳ in what manner did the Israelites cross the Jordan? Cant. R. to V, 13 עוֹבֵר הוא וחוזרוכ׳ he goes over his studies once and again ; a. fr.ע׳ את הדין to cross the line of justice, to be too severe. Midd. II, 2 כאילו עברו עליווכ׳ as if they had treated him too severely (arbitrarily). Ex. R. s. 30 כשם שאני יכול לַעֲבוֹר … ואני איני מַעֲבִירוכ׳ as I (the Lord) have power to treat the nations with rigor, but refrain from doing so, so shall you not go beyond the line of justice. Ib. עִיבְּרָה את הדין (Pi.); a. e. 3) (with על) to pass over (a sin); to forgive. Cant. R. to V, 5 (play on מור עובר, ib.) מר עובר ע׳ על מררי the bitterness passes away, he (the Lord) passes over my bitterness (sin). R. Hash. 17a (ref. To Mic. 7:18) למי נושא עון למי שעובר על פשע whose iniquity does he pardon? the iniquity of him who forgives (his neighbors) transgression; a. e. 4) to transgress, sin. Yoma 86b, a. e. כיון שע׳ אדם עבירה ושנהוכ׳ as soon as a man has committed a sin and repeated it, it becomes to him a permitted act. Ib. a, a. e. ע׳ על עשה when one has transgressed a positive law (committed a sin of omission). Ib. ע׳ על כריתותוכ׳ when one has committed sins punishable with extinction or death by a court. Erub.100a, a. fr. עובר על בלוכ׳, v. בַּל. Keth.VII, 6 העוֹבֶרֶת על דתוכ׳ if a wife offends against Mosaic or Jewish customs, v. דַּת; Y. ib. VII, 31c top נשים המְעַבְּרוֹת על הדת (Pi.); a. v. fr. 5) to pass, overtake, precede. Pes.7b כל המצות מברך עליהן עובר לעשייתן in the performance of all religious ceremonies one must say the benediction over them before doing them; מאי משמע דהאי עובר לישנא דאקדומי היא what evidence is there that this ‘ober has the meaning of precedence? Answ. by ref. to ויעבר (2 Sam. 18:23) ‘and he arrived before the Cushite. 6) to pass by, go away, be removed. Pes.III, 1 אלו עוֹבְרִין בפסח the following things must pass away (their use must be suspended) during Passover. Bets.26a, a. fr. מום עובר a transitory blemish, opp. קבוע. Ber.26a ע׳ יומו בטל קרבנו when its day is passed, the sacrifice of the day is void. Pes.II, 2 חמץ … שע׳ עליו הפסח leavened matter … over which Passover has passed (which had been in the house during Passover). Ber.IX, 3 הצועק לַשֶּׁעָבַרוכ׳ praying for what is passed (decided) is a vain prayer, e. g. if ones wife is with child, and one prays, may it be the will of God that my wife bear a male child; Y.Taan.II, 65c bot. נותן הודייה לשעבר וצועקוכ׳ one gives thanks for what is passed, and prays for what is to come. Gitt.VII, 7 כל זמן שאֱעֶבוֹר מכנגד פניךוכ׳ as soon as I shall have been out of thy sight for thirty days; Tosef. ib. VII (V), 10. Keth.17a ע׳ מלפני כלה he passed aside to make room for a bridal procession. Yoma 66a, a. e. חטאת שעָבְרָה שנתה a sin-offering whose year is passed (that is older than one year); Tem.22a שעִיבְּרָה שנתה (Pi.) whose year is completed (v. infra). Ib. 21b בכור שעברה שנתו a first-born animal older than one year; R. Hash. 5b; Zeb.29a bot. שעיברה; Tosef.Snh.III, 6 בכור שעיברה זמנו ed. Zuck. (read with Var.: שעבר). Keth.87a על שֶׁעָ׳ as regards the past, v. עָתִיד; a. v. fr.לַשֶּׁעָ׳ in former days. Gen. R. s. 47, opp. עַכְשָׁיו; a. fr. Hif. חֶעֱבִיר 1) to lead past, stroke gently. Tosef.Sabb.VII (VIII), 23 (read:) מַעֲבִירִין על גבי העין בשבת you are permitted to stroke a sore eye on the Sabbath; Y. ib. XIV, 14c bot. מעבירין על העין. Ib. הֶעֱבִירוּ עליו כלים they passed garments over it. 2) to cause to pass; to remove, displace. Keth.17a מַעֲבִירִין את המת מלפני כלהוכ׳ a funeral procession is made to make way for a bridal procession, and both of them for the king, v. supra. Gitt.57b שאין אנו מעבירין אותו באל אחר that we shall never displace him for another god; שאין מַעֲבִיר אותנווכ׳ that he will never displace us for another nation. Ex. R. s. 30 כאילו היא מעביר איקיניןוכ׳ as if he removed (defaced) the kings portrait; a. fr. 3) to go beyond. Ib. איני מעבירוכ׳, v. supra. Ib. הבריות מעבירין על הדיןוכ׳ men go beyond the line of justice (are treacherous, cruel), and they are punished; a. e. 4) to skip over; to forego, postpone.ה׳ על מדותיו, v. מִדָּה.Yoma 33a; 58b, a. fr. אין מעבירין על המצות you must not forego the occasion for performing a religious act. Erub.64b אין מעבירין על האוכלין you must not pass by eatables (and let them lie in the street); B. Mets.23a; a. fr. 5) to forego, overlook, pardon. R. Hash. 17a (ref. to Mic. 7:18) מעביר ראשון ראשין וכך היא המדה (Ms. M. על ראשוןוכ׳; v. Rabb. D. S. a. l. note) he pardons one sin after the other (before they are put on the scale), and such is the divine dealing. Ib. מעבירין לו על כל פשעיו all his transgressions are pardoned; a. fr. 6) to cause to forego or disregard. Erub.41b שלשה דברים מעבירין … עלוכ׳ three things make a man disregard his own sense (of right) and the sense of his Maker; a. e. Pi. עִיבֵּר 1) to be completed, full. Tem.22a, a. e., v. supra. 2) to transgress repeatedly. Y.Keth.VII, 31c top, v. supra. 3) to go beyond. Ex. R. l. c. עיברה את הדין, v. supra. Tosef.B. Kam. VI, 22 שעיברה הדליקה עד, read with Y. ib. VII, 5c. שעברה … את. 4) (v. עוּבָּר) to carry, be with young. Kidd.31b כי עִבַּרְתּוֹ אמווכ׳ while his mother was pregnant with him, his father died. Tosef.B. Kam. X, 1 ועִיבְּרָה אצלו (B. Kam.IX, 1 ונִתְעַבְּרָה) and the cow became pregnant while she was in his possession. Ḥull.58a; a. fr.Part. pass. f. מְעוּבֶּרֶת; pl. מְעוּבָּרוֹת pregnant. Yeb.XVI, 1. Ib. 36b, a. e. מע׳ חבירו a woman who is with child of another man (divorced or widowed during pregnancy). Gen. R. s. 85 מלכים אני מע׳ גיאלים אני מע׳ I am pregnant with kings, with redeemers (kings and redeemers are destined to be of my offspring). Yeb.III, 10; a. fr. 4) (v. עִיבּוּר) to extend the city limits, for the purpose of defining Sabbath distances, in cases of buildings projecting beyond the city lines (outskirts). Erub.V, 1 כיצד מְעַבְּרִיןוכ׳ (v. אָבַר), defined ib. 53a; Y. ib. V, beg.22b; Y.Ber.VII, 12c top כאשה עוברה like a pregnant woman; Tosef. ib. VI (V), 1; a. e. 6) to complement, add to, esp. to intercalate a month, (second Adar); proclaim a leap year; to complement a month (v. מָלֵא) by assigning to it an additional day (thirty days). Tosef.Snh.II, 1 שנים אומרים צריכה לְעַבֵּר if two judges say, it is necessary to intercalate a month. Ib. 2 על שלשה סימנים מעבריןוכ׳ on three indications the intercalation is decided; על שנים מעבריןוכ׳ when two of them exist, the intercalation is decreed. Ib. ואם עִיבְּרוּהָ הרי זו מעוברת but if they proclaimed it a leap-year, it remains a leap-year; a. fr.Part. pass. מְעוּבָּר; f. מְעוּבֶּרֶת. R. Hash. 19b אלול מע׳ an Elul of thirty days. Snh.11b אינה מע׳ the year is not a leap-year (the declared intercalation is invalid); a. fr. Hithpa. הִתְעַבֵּר, Nithpa. נִתְעַבֵּר 1) to swell (with anger), to become wroth. Sifré Num. 135 (expl. ויתעבר, Deut. 3:26) כאדם שאומר נ׳ בי פלוני נתמלאוכ׳ as a man says, that man (became full) got wroth with me, meaning, he was filled with wrath against me; Yalk. Deut. 818; Sifré Deut. 29 כאשה שאינה יכולה לשוח מפני עוברה ( swelled,) like a woman that cannot bend down on account of the child she is pregnant with; v. עֶבְרָה. 2) to become pregnant. Gen. R. s. 45 מביאה … נִתְעַבְּרָה she conceived on her first intercourse; אין אשה מִתְעַבֶּרֶתוכ׳ no woman conceives on ; Yeb.34a. Ib. b כדי שלא תִתְעַבֵּרוכ׳ that she may not become with child, and her beauty, v. כָּחַש. B. Kam.IX, 1 ונתעברה אצלו, v. supra; a. fr. 3) to be extended, to be consolidated into one township. Y.Erub.V, 22b bot. יכול אני … בית מעון מתעברתוכ׳ I can cause Beth Ma‘on and Tiberias to be considered one township (as regards Sabbath distances). 4) to be added to, to be proclaimed a full month (of thirty days), a leap-year (of thirteen months). Y.R. Hash. III, beg. 58c ניסן לא נ׳ מימיו Nisan was never made a full month (by decree of the court); Y.Shebi.X, beg.39b; a. e.Snh.12a ראויה … שתִּתְעַבֵּר that year ought to have been a leap-year. B. Mets. נִתְעַבְּרָה השנה נתע׳ לשוכר if the year was made a leap-year, the tenant (that rented by the year) reaps the benefit of the intercalation. R. Hash. 19b; a. fr. Nif. נֶעֱבַר (with עֲבֵרָה) to be committed. Tosef.B. Kam. X, 3 בהמה ונֶעֶבְרָה בה עבירה if one stole a beast, and some sinful act was committed on it (by which it became forbidden for any benefit); (B. Kam.IX, 2, a. fr. נעבדה … עבירה).

    Jewish literature > עָבַר

  • 16 λόγος

    λόγος, ου, ὁ (verbal noun of λέγω in the sense ‘pick’; Hom.+).
    ① a communication whereby the mind finds expression, word
    ⓐ of utterance, chiefly oral.
    α. as expression, word (oratorical ability plus exceptional performance were distinguishing marks in Hellenic society, hence the frequent association of λ. and ἔργον ‘deed’; a sim. formulation as early as Il. 9, 443 μύθων τε ῥητῆρʼ ἔμεναι πρηκτῆρά τε ἔργων; Polystrat. p. 33 μὴ λόγῳ μόνον ἀλλʼ ἔργω; Just., A II, 4, 2 ἢ λόγῳ ἢ ἔργῳ and D. 35, 7 λόγον ἢ πρᾶξιν) δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ κ. λόγῳ, i.e. an exceptional personage Lk 24:19; pl. of Moses Ac 7:22 (the contrast expressed w. a verb Choix 20, 6–8 ποιεῖ ἀγαθὸν ὄτι δύναται καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ of Apollordorus, a benefactor in Cyzicus, a flourishing city in Phrygia; sim. New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 8f πολιτευόμενος … λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ; cp. IKourion 32, 8; without contrast Diod S 13, 101, 3 ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς; for sim. constructions using λέγω and πράσσω s. Danker, Benefactor 339–43). Cp. Ro 15:18; 2 Cor 10:11; Col 3:17; 2 Th 2:17; Hb 13:21 v.l.; 1J 3:18 (cp. Theognis 1, 87f Diehl3 μή μʼ ἔπεσιν μὲν στέργε κτλ.—For the contrast λόγῳ … ἀληθείᾳ cp. Diod S 13, 4, 1). In contrast to a sinful deed we also have the λόγος ἁμαρτίας sinful word Judaicon 172, 9. W. γνῶσις: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5. ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ, ἀλλʼ οὐ τῇ γνώσει 2 Cor 11:6. (Opp. δύναμις ‘revelation of power’) 1 Cor 4:19, 20. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Th 1:5 (cp. Ar. 13, 7 of mythical accounts οὐδέν εἰσιν εἰ μὴ μόνον λόγοι ‘they’re nothing but words’). W. ἐπιστολή: 2 Th 2:2, 15. W. ἀναστροφή: 1 Ti 4:12; 1 Pt 3:1b. Opp. ‘be silent’: IRo 2:1.—μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ just say the word Mt 8:8; cp. Lk 7:7 (Ath. 17, 1 ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; 29, 2; Phalaris, Ep. 121, 1 λόγῳ λέγειν; cp. schol. on Pla. 341a ἐν λόγῳ μόνον εἰπεῖν). οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον no one was able to answer him a (single) word Mt 22:46; cp. 15:23 (cp. TestAbr A 16 p. 98, 11 [Stone p. 44] οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λόγον).— The (mighty) word (of one who performs miracles) ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Mt 8:16 (a rare use of λ. as ‘single utterance’, s. L-S-J-M s.v. VII).—διὰ λόγου by word of mouth (opp. ‘by letter’) Ac 15:27.—In the textually uncertain pass. Ac 20:24 the text as it stands in N., οὐδενὸς λόγου (v.l. λόγον) ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν, may well mean: I do not consider my life worth a single word (cp. λόγου ἄξιον [ἄξιος 1a] and our ‘worth mention’; s. Conzelmann ad loc.).
    β. The expression may take on a variety of formulations or topical nuances: what you say Mt 5:37; statement (PGM 4, 334) Lk 20:20; question (Sext. Emp., Math. 8, 295; 9, 133; Diog. L. 2, 116) ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς λόγον I will ask you a question (cp. TestJob 36:5; GrBar 5:1; ApcSed 13:6; Jos., Ant. 12, 99) Mt 21:24; cp. Mk 11:29; Lk 20:3; prayer (PGM 1, 25; 4, 90; 179; 230 al.; 5, 180; 196 al.) Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39. ἡγούμενος τοῦ λ. principal speaker Ac 14:12. W. epexeget. gen. λ. παρακλήσεως 13:15. W. κήρυγμα our manner of presentation and our proclamation 1 Cor 2:4a (but s. comm.). (W. διδασκαλία) preaching 1 Ti 5:17; prophecy (Biogr. p. 364 [Pythia]) J 2:22; 18:32. Command (Aeschyl., Pers. 363) Lk 4:36; 2 Pt 3:5, 7; via a letter 2 Th 3:14. Report, story (X., An. 1, 4, 7; Diod S 3, 40, 9; 19, 110, 1 λ. διαδιδόναι=spread a report; Appian, Iber. 80 §346, Maced. 4 §1 [both=rumor]; Diod S 32, 15, 3 ἦλθεν ὁ λ. ἐπί τινα=the report came to someone; Arrian, Anab. 7, 22, 1 λόγος λέγεται τοιόσδε=a story is told like this, Ind. 9, 2; Diod S 3, 18, 3 λ.=story, account; Jos., Ant. 19, 132; Tat. 27, 2 τοῦ καθʼ Ἡρακλέα λόγου) Mt 28:15; Mk 1:45; Lk 5:15 (λ. περί τινος as X., An. 6, 6, 13; Jos., Ant. 19, 127) 7:17; J 21:23. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τ. ἐκκλησίας the report came to the ears of the assembly in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. λόγον ἔχειν σοφίας have the appearance of wisdom, pass for wisdom Col 2:23 (cp. Pla., Epinomis 987b ἔχει λόγον; Demosth., C. Lept. 462 [20, 18] λόγον τινʼ ἔχον; but mng. 2f is possible). Proverb (Pla., Phdr. 17, 240c, Symp. 18, 195b, Gorg. 54, 499c, Leg. 6, 5, 757a; Socrat., Ep. 22, 1) J 4:37 (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 13, 7 ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ὁ λ. foll. by a proverb). Proclamation, instruction, teaching, message Lk 4:32; 10:39; J 4:41; 17:20; Ac 2:41; 4:4; 10:44; 20:7; 1 Cor 1:17; 2:1. In Ac18:15 ζητήματα περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου the sense appears to be someth. like this: controversial issues involving disputes about words and your way of life with λ. prob. referring to the presentation of controversial subjects, which in turn arouses heated ζητήματα debates. λόγος σοφίας proclamation of wisdom, speaking wisely 1 Cor 12:8a (Ps.-Phoc. 129 τῆς θεοπνεύστου σοφίης λ.); corresp. λ. γνώσεως vs. 8b. Cp. 14:9; 15:2; 2 Cor 1:18; 6:7; 10:10. λ. μαρτυρίας word of witness Rv 12:11. ὁ κατὰ τ. διδαχὴν πιστὸς λ. the message of faith, corresponding to the teaching Tit 1:9; the opp. 2 Ti 2:17. A speech (Aristot. p. 14b, 2; Diod S 40, 5a) διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ in a long speech Ac 15:32; cp. 20:2. λ. κολακείας flattering speech 1 Th 2:5. Speaking gener. 2 Cor 8:7; Eph 6:19; Col 4:6; D 2:5. ἐν λόγῳ πταίειν make a mistake in what one says Js 3:2.—Of God’s word, command, commission (LXX; ParJer 5:19 κατηχῆσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν λόγον; SyrBar 13:2; ApcSed 14:10; Just., D. 84, 2; Ael. Aristid. hears a ἱερὸς λ. at night fr. a god: 28, 116 K.=49, p. 529 D.; Sextus 24) ἠκυρώσατε τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 15:6 (v.l. νόμον, ἐντολήν); cp. Mk 7:13.—J 5:38; 8:55; 10:35; Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6). Of God’s promise Ro 9:6, 9 (but these two vss., and Gal 5:14 below, prob. fit better under 2a), 28 (Is 10:22f). Cp. Hb 2:2; 4:2 (s. ἀκοή 4b); 7:28; 12:19. For B 15:1 see 1aδ. The whole law (as the expr. εἴ τι ἑτέρα ἐντολή indicates not limited to a narrow list of commandments), acc. to Ro 13:9. In what is prob. a play on words (s. 2a and b), Gal 5:14 (s. 2a below) is summed up in the λόγος as expressed in Lev 19:18.—That which God has created ἁγιάζεται διὰ λόγου θεοῦ 1 Ti 4:5; in line w. the context, this hardly refers to God’s creative word (so SibOr 3, 20; PtK 2; πάντα γὰρ λόγῳ ποιήσας ὁ θεός Theoph. Ant. 2, 18 [144, 8]), but to table prayers which use biblical expressions. The divine word as judge of thoughts Hb 4:12. τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 17:17; cp. 19:9.—Of the divine revelation through Christ and his messengers (Just., A I, 61, 9 λόγον … παρὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐμάθομεν τοῦτον) θεὸς ἐφανέρωσεν τὸν λ. αὐτοῦ ἐν κηρύγματι Tit 1:3. δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λ. σου J 17:14; cp. vss. 6, 17; 1J 1:10; 2:14. ἵνα μὴ ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ βλασφημῆται Tit 2:5. The apostles and other preachers, w. ref. to the λόγος of God, are said to: λαλεῖν Ac 4:29, 31; 13:46; Phil 1:14; Hb 13:7; καταγγέλλειν Ac 13:5; 17:13; διδάσκειν 18:11; μαρτυρεῖν Rv 1:2. Of their hearers it is said: τὸν λ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούειν Ac 13:7; δέχεσθαι 8:14; 11:1. Of the λ. τοῦ θεοῦ itself we read: ηὔξανεν Ac 6:7; 12:24; 19:20; οὐ δέδεται 2 Ti 2:9. In these places and many others ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ is simply the Christian message, the gospel: Lk 5:1; 8:11, 21; 11:28 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 1, 20 μὴ μόνον ἀκουόντων ἀλλὰ πασχόντων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων=let the message have its effect on oneself); Ac 6:2 (s. καταλείπω 7c; for prob. commercial metaph. s. 2a below); 13:44 v.l. (for κυρίου); 16:32 v.l.; 1 Cor 14:36; 2 Cor 2:17; 4:2; Col 1:25; 1 Pt 1:23; Rv 1:9; 6:9; 20:4; IPhld 11:1. Cp. 1 Th 2:13ab; 1J 2:5.—Since this ‘divine word’ is brought to humanity through Christ, his word can be used in the same sense: ὁ λόγος μου J 5:24; cp. 8:31, 37, 43, 51f; 12:48; 14:23f; 15:3, 20b; Rv 3:8. ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Col 3:16; cp. Hb 6:1. ὁ λ. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 8:25; 12:24 v.l.; 13:44, 48f; 14:25 v.l.; 15:35, 36; 16:32 (cp. λ. θεοῦ); 19:10; 1 Th 1:8; 2 Th 3:1. Pl. Mk 8:38 (Lk 9:26); 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Lk 24:44; s. also 1aδ.—Or it is called simply ὁ λόγος=the ‘Word’, for no misunderstanding would be possible among Christians: Mt 13:20–23; Mk 2:2; 4:14–20, 33; 8:32 (s. 1aε below); 16:20; Lk 1:2; 8:12f, 15; Ac 6:4; 8:4; 10:36 (on the syntax s. FNeirynck, ETL 60, ’84, 118–23); 11:19; 14:25 (cp. λ. κυρίου above); 16:6; 17:11; 18:5; Gal 6:6; Phil 1:14; Col 4:3; 1 Th 1:6; 2 Ti 4:2; Js 1:21ff; 1 Pt 2:8; 3:1; 1J 2:7; AcPl Ha 7, 6 (so also Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 2, 3).—Somet. the ‘Word’ is more closely defined by a gen.: ὁ λ. τῆς βασιλείας the word of the reign/rule (of God) Mt 13:19. τῆς σωτηρίας Ac 13:26. τῆς καταλλαγῆς 2 Cor 5:19. τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. δικαιοσύνης (q.v. 3a) Hb 5:13. ζωῆς Phil 2:16. (τῆς) ἀληθείας (Theoph. Ant. 3, 4 [p. 212, 2]; cp. περὶ ἀληθείας Hippol., Ref. 10, 6, 1) Eph 1:13; Col 1:5; 2 Ti 2:15; Js 1:18; AcPl Ha 8, 8 (Just., D. 121, 2). τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) Ac 14:3; 20:32. (Differently the pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. χάριτος gracious words Lk 4:22; cp. Marcellinus, Vi. Thu. 57 Hude λόγοι εἰρωνείας.) ὁ λ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ac 15:7; ὁ τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ λ. MPol 10:1. In Rv 3:10 the gospel is described by the ‘One who has the key of David’ as ὁ λ. τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου my word of endurance (W-S. §30, 12c). λ. τῶν ὑ[πο]μονῶν AcPl Ha 6, 11. παρελάβετε τὸν λ. ὅτι AcPl Ha 8, 25.—The pastoral letters favor the expr. πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (sc. ἐστίν, and s. πιστός 1b) 1 Ti 1:15; 3:1; 4:9; 2 Ti 2:11; Tit 3:8; cp. Rv 21:5; 22:6. λ. ὑγιής sound preaching Tit 2:8; cp. the pl. ὑγιαίνοντες λόγοι 2 Ti 1:13 (on medicinal use of words for the mind or soul s. VLeinieks, The City of Dionysos ’96, 115–22, on Eur.).—The pl. is also used gener. of Christian teachings, the words of the gospel Lk 1:4 (s. κατηχέω 2a); 1 Th 4:18. οἱ λ. τῆς πίστεως 1 Ti 4:6. On λόγοι κυριακοί for λόγια κυριακά in the title of the Papias document s. ἐξήγησις 2.—JSchniewind, Die Begriffe Wort und Evangelium bei Pls, diss. Bonn 1910; RAsting (εὐαγγέλιον, end).
    γ. of an individual declaration or remark: assertion, declaration, speech ἀκούσαντες τὸν λ. when they heard the statement Mt 15:12; cp. 19:11, 22; 22:15; Mk 5:36. διὰ τοῦτον τὸν λ. because of this statement of yours 7:29 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 29 [Stone p. 38] τὸν λ. τοῦτον; ApcMos 25 εἰς τὸν λόγον σου κρινῶ σε). Cp. 10:22; 12:13; Lk 1:29; 22:61 v.l. (for ῥήματος); J 4:39, 50; 6:60; 7:36, 40 v.l.; 15:20a; 18:9; 19:8; Ac 6:5; 7:29; 20:38; 22:22; 1 Th 4:15. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου whoever utters a (defamatory) word against the Son of Humanity Mt 12:32 (λ. εἰπεῖν κατά τινος as Jos., Ant. 15, 81); cp. Lk 12:10. λόγος σαπρός unwholesome talk Eph 4:29. λόγον ποιεῖσθαι make a speech Ac 11:2 D (cp. Hyperid. 3, 20; Jos., Ant. 11, 86).
    δ. the pl. (οἱ) λόγοι is used, on the one hand, of words uttered on various occasions, of speeches or instruction given here and there by humans or transcendent beings (TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 19 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 4, 264; Just., D. 100, 3) ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου δικαιωθήσῃ (καταδικασθήσῃ) Mt 12:37ab; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 21:33; Ac 2:40; 7:22 (ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ. On the word-deed pair cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 6 the λόγοι and ἔργα of Diogenes; s. α above). οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten commandments (Ex 34:28; Dt 10:4; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 168, Decal. 32; Jos., Ant. 3, 138; cp. 91f; Did., Gen. 36, 10) B 15:1. Ac 15:24; 20:35; 1 Cor 2:4b, 13; 14:19ab; κενοὶ λ. Eph 5:6; AcPl Ox 6, 13 (cp. Aa 1, 241, 14); Dg 8:2; πλαστοὶ λ. 2 Pt 2:3. λ. πονηροί 3J 10.—Also of words and exprs. that form a unity, whether it be connected discourse (Jos., Ant. 15, 126; Just., A II, 12, 6, D. 11, 5; 81, 3 al.), a conversation, or parts of one and the same teaching, or expositions on the same subject (Diod S 16, 2, 3 μετέσχε τῶν Πυθαγορίων λόγων; Dio Chrys. 37 [54], 1; Ael. Aristid. 50, 55 K.=26 p. 519 D.: οἱ Πλάτωνος λόγοι; PsSol 17:43 [words of the Messiah]; AscIs 3:12 οἱ λόγοι τοῦ Βελχειρά) πᾶς ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:24; cp. vss. 26, 28; 10:14; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 10:24; Lk 1:20; 6:47; 9:28, 44. ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς he questioned him at some length 23:9. τίνες οἱ λ. οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε; what is this conversation that you are holding? 24:17; J 7:40 (s. γ); 10:19; J 14:24a; 19:13; Ac 2:22; 5:5, 24; 16:36; 2 Ti 4:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 46:7. λόγοις φθοριμαίοις AcPlCor 1:2.
    ε. the subject under discussion, matter, thing gener. (Theognis 1055 Diehl; Hdt. 8, 65 μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπῃς. Cp. Hebr. דָּבָר) τὸν λ. ἐκράτησαν they took up the subject Mk 9:10; cp. Mt. 21:24 (s. 1aβ beg.). οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ you have no share in this matter Ac 8:21. ἰδεῖν περὶ τ. λόγου τούτου look into this matter 15:6. ἔχειν πρός τινα λόγον have a complaint against someone (cp. Demosth. 35, 55 ἐμοὶ πρὸς τούτους ὁ λόγος; PIand 16, 3 δίκαιον λόγον ἔχει πρὸς σέ) 19:38. παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (2d is also prob.).—Perh. also Mk 8:32 he discussed the subject quite freely (but s. 1aβ above).
    ⓑ of literary or oratorical productions: of the separate books of a work (Hdt. 5, 36 ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τ. λόγων; Pla., Parmen. 2, 127d ὁ πρῶτος λόγος; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 1 ὁ μὲν πρότερος λόγος ἦν ἡμῖν, ὦ Θεόδοτε, περὶ τοῦ …) treatise Ac 1:1 (s. on the prologue to Ac: AHilgenfeld, ZWT 41, 1898, 619ff; AGercke, Her 29, 1894, 373ff; RLaqueur, Her 46, 1911, 161ff; Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; JCreed, JTS 35, ’34, 176–82; Goodsp., Probs. 119–21). Παπίας … πέντε λόγους κυριακῶν λογίων ἔγραψεν Papias (11:1; cp. 3:1 e; 11:2; 12:2).—περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11. Hb is described as ὁ λ. τῆς παρακλήσεως a word of exhortation (in literary form) 13:22. Of writings that are part of Holy Scripture ὁ λ. Ἠσαί̈ου J 12:38. ὁ λ. ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γεγραμμένος 15:25; ὁ προφητικὸς λ. 2 Pt 1:19; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.); AcPl Ha 8, 27/BMM recto 35 (Just., D. 77, 2 al.). ὁ ἅγιος λ. the holy word 1 Cl 56:3. ὁ λ. ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 Cor 15:54 (Is 25:8 and Hos 13:14 follow). Pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. προφητῶν Ac 15:15. ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαί̈ου Lk 3:4 (Pla., 7th Epistle 335a πείθεσθαι ἀεὶ χρὴ τοῖς παλαιοῖς καὶ ἱεροῖς λόγοις; TestJob 1:1 βίβλος λόγων Ἰώβ; ParJer 9:32 v.l. τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν λόγων Ἱερεμίου; ApcEsdr 1:1 καὶ ἀποκάλυψις τοῦ … Ἐσδράμ; ApcSed prol.; Just., D. 72, 3f).—Of the content of Rv: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων τ. λόγους τῆς προφητείας 1:3. οἱ λόγοι (τ. προφητείας) τ. βιβλίου τούτου 22:7, 9f, 18f.
    ② computation, reckoning
    ⓐ a formal accounting, esp. of one’s actions, and freq. with fig. extension of commercial terminology account, accounts, reckoning λόγον δοῦναι (Hdt. 8, 100; X., Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Diod S 3, 46, 4; SIG 1099, 16; BGU 164, 21; Jos., Ant. 16, 120; Just., D. 115, 6) give account, make an accounting ἕκαστος περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λόγον δώσει τ. θεῷ Ro 14:12. Also λ. ἀποδοῦναι abs. (Just., D. 116, 1 al.; Diod S 16, 56, 4; 19, 9, 4) Hb 13:17. τινί to someone (Diod S 16, 27, 4; Plut., Alcib. 7, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 2; SIG 631, 13 τᾷ πόλει; 2 Ch 34:28; Da 6:3 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 209) τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 Pt 4:5. τινὸς of someth. (SIG 1044, 46; 1105, 10 τοῦ ἀναλώματος; Jos., Ant. 19, 307) Lk 16:2 (here λ. w. the art.; on the subject of undergoing an audit cp. Aeschin. 3, 22). Likew. περί τινος (Diod S 18, 60, 2 δοὺς αὑτῷ περὶ τούτων λόγον=taking account [considering] with himself; BGU 98, 25 περὶ τούτου) Mt 12:36; Ac 19:40. ὑπέρ τινος concerning someone Hv 3, 9, 10.—αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί τινος call someone to account for someth. 1 Pt 3:15 (cp. Pla., Pol. 285e; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 30; Apc4Esdr Fgm. b ἕκαστος ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔργου τὸν λόγον ἀπαιτηθήσεται; Just., A I, 17, 4. For another perspective s. d below.).—Of banking responsibility ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ (PStras 72, 10 [III A.D.] ὁ τῶν θεῶν λ.; PHerm 108 [III A.D.] λ. τοῦ Σαραπείου) in wordplay Ac 6:2 (w. τράπεζα q.v. 1c); s. also 1aβ.—Of a ledger heading (POxy 1333 [II/III A.D.] δὸς αὐτῳ λόγῳ θεωρικῶν=credit him under ‘festivals’; for others s. Preisig., Wörterbuch s.v. λ. 14; s. also Fachwörter 119) Ro 9:6 (the point is that God’s ‘list’ of Israelites is accurate; on ἐκπίπτω in the sense ‘is not deficient’ s. s.v. 4); vs. 9 (the ‘count’ is subsumed by metonymy in divine promise); Gal 5:14 (all moral obligations come under one ‘entry’: ‘you shall love your neighbor as yourself’; for commercial association of ἀναλίσκω vs. 15, which rounds out the wordplay, s. s.v.). The contexts of these three passages suggest strong probability for commercial associations; for another view s. 1aβ.
    ⓑ settlement (of an account) (εἰς λόγον commercial t.t. ‘in settlement of an account’ POxy 275, 19; 21) εἰς λόγον δόσεως κ. λήμψεως in settlement of a mutual account (lit., ‘of giving and receiving’, ‘of debit and credit’) Phil 4:15 (cp. Plut., Mor. 11b λόγον δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν; a parallel formulation POxy 1134,10 [421 A.D.] λ. λήμματος καὶ ἐξοδιασμοῦ=ledger of income and expenditures); for the linked accounting terms δόσις and λήμψις s. PCairMasp 151, 208 [VI A.D.]. The same ideas are in the background of εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν credited to your account vs 17.—συναίρειν λόγον settle accounts (BGU 775, 18f. The mid. in the same mng. PFay109, 6 [I A.D.]; POxy 113, 27f.—Dssm., LO 94 [LAE 118f]) μετά τινος Mt 18:23; 25:19.
    ⓒ reflection, respect, regard εἰς λόγον τινός with regard to, for the sake of (Thu. 3, 46, 4; Demosth. 19, 142 εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον; Polyb. 11, 28, 8; Ath. 31, 1; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 743 D.: εἰς δεινότητος λ.) εἰς λ. τιμῆς IPhld 11:2. εἰς λ. θεοῦ ISm 10:1.
    ⓓ reason for or cause of someth., reason, ground, motive (Just., D. 94, 3 δότε μοι λόγον, ὅτου χάριν … ; Ath. 30, 3 τὶς γὰρ … λόγος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 18 ἐκ τούτου τ. λόγου; Appian, Hann. 29 §126 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 155) τίνι λόγω; for what reason? Ac 10:29 (cp. Pla., Gorg. 512c τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; Appian, Mithrid. 57 §232 τίνι λόγῳ;). λόγον περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Pt 3:15 (but s. a above); κατὰ λόγον Ac 18:14 (s. κατά B 5bβ). παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (though 1aε is also poss.).
    ⓔ πρὸς ὸ̔ν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος (ἐστίν) with whom we have to do (i.e. to reckon) (Dio Chrys. 31, 123; other exx. in FBleek, Hb II/1, 1836, 590ff), in his capacity as judge (Libanius, Legat. Ulixis [=Declamatio IV] 2 F. τοῖς δὲ ἀδίκως ἀποκτενοῦσι καὶ πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ὁ λόγος γίγνεται) Hb 4:13. οὐ πρὸς σάρκα ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ πρὸς θεόν he has to do not with flesh, but with God IMg 3:2.
    ⓕ In Col 2:23 (s. 1aβ) λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας may= make a case for wisdom (cp. λόγος ἡμῖν οὐδείς Plut., Mor. 870b).
    ③ the independent personified expression of God, the Logos. Our lit. shows traces of a way of thinking that was widespread in contemporary syncretism, as well as in Jewish wisdom lit. and Philo, the most prominent feature of which is the concept of the Logos, the independent, personified ‘Word’ (of God): GJs 11:2 (word of the angel to Mary) συνλήμψῃ ἐκ Λόγου αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ πάντων Δεσπότου). J 1:1abc, 14 (cp. Just., A I, 23, 2; Mel., P. 9, 61 and oft. by all apolog., exc.. Ar.). It is the distinctive teaching of the Fourth Gospel that this divine ‘Word’ took on human form in a historical person, that is, in Jesus (s. RSeeberg, Festgabe für AvHarnack ’21, 263–81.—Λόγος w. ζωή in gnostic speculation: Iren.1, 1, 1 [Harv. 1, 10, 4]; Aelian, VH 4, 20 ἐκάλουν τὸν Πρωταγόραν Λόγον. Similarly Favorinus [II A.D.]: Vorsokr. 80 A 1 ln. 22 [in Diog. L. 9, 50] of Democritus: ἐκαλεῖτο Σοφία. Equating a divinity with an abstraction that she personifies: Artem. 5, 18 φρόνησις εἶναι νομίζεται ἡ θεός [Athena]). Cp. 1J 1:1; Rv 19:13. εἷς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰ. Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος, ἀπὸ σιγῆς προελθών there is one God, who has revealed himself through Jesus Christ his Son, who is his ‘Word’ proceeding from silence (i.e., without an oral pronouncement: in a transcendent manner) IMg 8:2 (s. σιγή). The Lord as νόμος κ. λόγος PtK 1. Cp. Dg 11:2, 3, 7, 8; 12:9.—HClavier, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 81–93: the Alexandrian eternal λόγος is also implied in Hb 4:12; 13:7.—S. also the ‘Comma Johanneum’ (to the bibliography in RGG3 I, ’54 [HGreeven] add AJülicher, GGA 1905, 930–35; AvHarnack, SBBerlAk 1915, 572f [=Studien I ’31, 151f]; MMeinertz, Einl. in d. NT4 ’33, 309–11; AGreiff, TQ 114, ’33, 465–80; CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46; WThiele, ZNW 50, ’59, 61–73) ὁ πατήρ, ὁ λόγος καὶ τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 1J 5:7 v.l. (s. N. app.; Borger, TRu 52, ’87, 57f). (Such interpolations were not unheard of. According to Diog. L. 1, 48 some people maintain that Solon inserted the verse mentioning the Athenians after Il. 2, 557.—τῆς τριάδος, τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς σοφίας αὐτοῦ Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 19].)—On the Logos: EZeller, D. Philosophie der Griechen III 24 1903, 417–34; MHeinze, D. Lehre v. Logos in d. griech. Philosophie 1872; PWendland, Philo u. d. kynisch-stoische Diatribe (Beiträge z. Gesch. der griech. Philosophie u. Religion by Wendl. and OKern 1895, 1–75); AAall, Gesch. d. Logosidee 1896, 1899; MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48f, I 482; 490 (index); LDürr, D. Wertung des göttl. Wortes im AT u. im ant. Orient ’38 (§9 of the Joh. Logos); EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1907, 83–111; (2 ’25); JLebreton, Les théories du Logos au début de l’ère chrétienne 1907; ESchwartz, NGG 1908, 537–56; GVos, The Range of the Logos-Title in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel: PTR 11, 1913, 365–419; 557–602; RHarris, The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel 1917, Athena, Sophia and the Logos: BJRL 7, 1, 1922 p. 56–72; M-JLagrange, Vers le Logos de S. Jean: RB 32, 1923, 161–84, Le Logos de Philon: ibid. 321–71; HLeisegang, Logos: Pauly-W. XIII 1926, 1035–81; TGlasson, Heraclitus’ Alleged Logos Doctr., JTS 3, ’52, 231–38.—NWeinstein, Z. Genesis d. Agada 1901, 29–90; Billerb. II 302–33.—Rtzst., Zwei religionsgeschichtl. Fragen 1901, 47–132, Mysterienrel.3 1927, 428 index; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 304ff; 316f; JKroll, D. Lehren d. Hermes Trismegistos1914, 418 index.—RBultmann, D. religionsgesch. Hintergrund des Prol. z. Joh.: HGunkel Festschr., 1923, II 1–26, Comm. ’41, 5ff; AAlexander, The Johannine Doctrine of the Logos: ET 36, 1925, 394–99; 467–72; (Rtzst. and) HSchaeder, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, 306–37; 350; GAvdBerghvanEysinga, In den beginne was de Logos: NThT 23, ’34, 105–23; JDillersberger, Das Wort von Logos ’35; RBury, The 4th Gosp. and the Logos-Doctrine ’40; EMay, CBQ 8, ’46, 438–47; GKnight, From Moses to Paul ’49, 120–29. TW IV 76–89; 126–40 (on this s. SLyonnet, Biblica 26, ’45, 126–31); CStange, ZST 21, ’50, 120–41; MBoismard, Le Prologue de St. Jean ’53; HLangkammer, BZ 9, ’65, 91–94; HRinggren, Word and Wisdom [hypostatization in Near East] ’47; WEltester, Haenchen Festschr., ’64, 109–34; HWeiss, Untersuchungen zur Kosmologie etc., TU 97, ’66, 216–82; MRissi, Die Logoslieder im Prolog des vierten Evangeliums, TZ 31, ’75, 321–36; HLausberg, NAWG, Ph. ’87, 1 pp. 1–7.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. λέγω B 1. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λόγος

  • 17 way

    wei 1. noun
    1) (an opening or passageway: This is the way in/out; There's no way through.) vei
    2) (a route, direction etc: Which way shall we go?; Which is the way to Princes Street?; His house is on the way from here to the school; Will you be able to find your/the way to my house?; Your house is on my way home; The errand took me out of my way; a motorway.) vei, retning
    3) (used in the names of roads: His address is 21 Melville Way.) vei
    4) (a distance: It's a long way to the school; The nearest shops are only a short way away.) avstand
    5) (a method or manner: What is the easiest way to write a book?; I know a good way of doing it; He's got a funny way of talking; This is the quickest way to chop onions.) metode, måte, skikk
    6) (an aspect or side of something: In some ways this job is quite difficult; In a way I feel sorry for him.) måte
    7) (a characteristic of behaviour; a habit: He has some rather unpleasant ways.) vane
    8) (used with many verbs to give the idea of progressing or moving: He pushed his way through the crowd; They soon ate their way through the food.) (bane) vei; gjennom; (gi) etter
    2. adverb
    ((especially American) by a long distance or time; far: The winner finished the race way ahead of the other competitors; It's way past your bedtime.) langt; høyt
    - wayside
    - be/get on one's way
    - by the way
    - fall by the wayside
    - get/have one's own way
    - get into / out of the way of doing something
    - get into / out of the way of something
    - go out of one's way
    - have a way with
    - have it one's own way
    - in a bad way
    - in
    - out of the/someone's way
    - lose one's way
    - make one's way
    - make way for
    - make way
    - under way
    - way of life
    - ways and means
    fart
    --------
    måte
    --------
    retning
    --------
    vis
    I
    subst. \/weɪ\/
    1) ( om retning) vei
    • can you tell me the way to the mall?
    • this way, please
    denne veien, takk
    2) utvei, råd, mulighet, løsning
    3) ( fremgangsmåte) måte, vis
    • do you know the right way to do this?
    • do it your own way!
    4) vis, måte, henseende
    5) ( gammeldags) vei, sti
    6) ( personlig egenskap) vesen, måte å være på, atferd
    7) ( gammeldags) bransje, fag, område
    8) (sjøfart, gammeldags) fart
    9) (etter stedsnavn, hverdagslig) -traktene
    allow somebody his\/her own way la noen få det som han\/hun vil
    all the way ( også overført) hele veien, for alle penga, helt
    any way hvilken som helst vei, (til) hvilken som helst retning (på) hvilken som helst måte i alle tilfeller, uansett, likevel
    ask the\/one's way spørre om veien, spørre seg frem
    be by the way ( om kommentar eller bemerkning) mangle betydning, ikke vedkomme sammenhengen
    beg one's way tigge seg frem
    be in a way about something være opprørt over noe
    be in the way of være i veien for
    be on the way være på vei
    be on the way in\/out (hverdagslig, om moter og trender) være på vei inn\/ut, begynne å bli populær(t)\/upopulær(t), begynne å bli moderne\/umoderne
    be under way være i gang, være underveis, gjøre fremskritt ( sjøfart) i fart
    be well on the\/one's way være et godt stykke på vei ( overført) være på god vei
    borrow one's way låne seg frem
    by a long way ( overført) langt på vei
    by the way ( gammeldags) nær veien, ved veien, inntil veien
    i forbifarten forresten, apropos, forøvrig
    • by the way, do you know if she's at home today?
    forresten, vet du om hun er hjemme i dag?
    by way of via, over, gjennom
    som, til
    for å, i den hensikt å
    clear the way bane vei, gi plass
    clear the way! ut av veien!, unna vei!
    come a long way komme langveisfra ( overført) nå langt
    come somebody's way komme på noens trakter
    • if a great fortune should come my way, I would leave this godforsaken place
    hvis en stor formue skulle komme meg til del, ville jeg forlate dette gudsforlatte stedet
    come up the hard way gå den lange veien, arbeide seg opp fra ingenting
    cut one's way bane seg vei
    down our way ( hverdagslig) nede hos oss, hjemme hos oss, i våre trakter, der vi kommer fra
    forklaring: holde på en hest som vinner eller på plassering
    hver vei
    either way begge veier fra eller til, uansett
    every which way (amer.) alle veier
    alle midler, alle måter
    fall somebody's way komme noen til del, komme noen til gode
    feel one's way forsøke seg frem, føle seg for\/frem
    fight one's way ( også overført) kjempe seg frem, slå seg gjennom, slå seg frem, bryte seg vei
    find a\/some way ( overført) finne (på) en utvei, finne en løsning, finne på noe
    fumble one's way famle seg frem, famle etter veien
    get into the way of venne seg til, sette seg inn i
    get one's way få viljen sin
    get one's way with (få lov til å) ha sex med
    get out of someone's way ( også overført) holde seg unna noen, ikke stå i veien for noen
    • she was angry with me, so I got out of her way
    hun var sint på meg, så jeg holdt meg unna henne
    get something out of the way bli kvitt noe, kvitte seg med noe, rydde noe av veien
    get under way komme i gang, få i gang ( sjøfart) komme i sig
    go a great way with somebody bety mye for noen ha stor innflytelse hos noen
    go all the way løpe linen ut, ta steget fullt ut samtykke helt og holdent ( hverdagslig) ha sex (med noen)
    go a long way eller go a great way eller go far ( også overført) gå langt rekke langt, være drøy bidra sterkt
    go a long way round gå en skikkelig omvei
    go\/take one's own way ( overført) gå sin egen vei, handle etter eget hode
    go one's way ( litterært) gå sin vei
    go out of one's way ta en omvei, gjøre en avstikker
    ( overført) gjøre seg ekstra besvær, virkelig anstrenge seg
    go over in a big way slå voldsomt an, gjøre enorm suksess
    go someone's way gå bra for noen, gå i noens favør
    gå samme vei som noen
    • are you going my way?
    go the right way about it gripe saken riktig an, begynne i riktig ende
    go the right way to work gripe saken riktig an
    go the way of all flesh eller go the way of all the earth eller go the way of nature gå all kjødets gang, vandre heden, forgå, gå til grunne, dø
    have a way of ha en tendens til å, pleie å
    have a way with something\/someone ha et (godt) lag med noe\/noen, ha tekke
    have (it) one's own way eller have one's way få det som man vil, bestemme selv, få viljen sin
    • have it your own way!
    • if I had my way...
    om jeg fikk bestemme...
    have it both ways få både i pose og sekk
    have way on ( sjøfart) ha (god) fart
    hold\/keep one's way gå på, fortsette
    in all ways på alle vis, i alle henseender, på alle (mulige) måter
    in any way på noe vis
    • can I help you in any way?
    på en hvilken som helst måte
    in a way på sett og vis, på en måte
    in a small way i liten skala\/målestokk
    in no way ikke i det hele tatt, på ingen måte
    in one way på sett og vis, på en måte
    in some ways på sett og vis, på en måte
    in the way i veien ( gammeldags) i nærheten
    in the way of ( overført) i form av, med hensyn til, av
    • what shall we give her in the way of a present?
    in this way på denne måten
    it cuts both ways ( overført) det er på både godt og vondt, det er et tveegget sverd, det går i begge retninger, det slår begge veier
    keep out of someone's way ( overført) gå ut av veien for noen, holde seg ute av veien for noen, holde seg unna noen
    know one's way about kjenne til veiene, være bra orientert kunne klare seg ha rede på saker og ting
    lead the way (gå foran og) vise veien
    learn (something) the hard way arbeide seg opp fra bunnen, lære (noe) av erfaring, måtte slite for noe
    light somebody the way ( gammeldags) lyse veien for noen
    a little goes a long way det skal ikke så mye til, det er drøyt
    live in a large\/small way leve flott\/enkelt
    the longest way round is the nearest way home den korteste veien er ikke alltid den raskeste
    look the other way eller look another way se en annen vei, se bort, vende seg bort
    lose the\/one's way gå (seg) vill, kjøre (seg) bort
    lose way ( sjøfart) miste fart
    make one's own way slå seg frem på egen hånd
    make one's way ( også overført) bane seg frem, ta seg frem, komme seg frem
    make way gi plass, gå ut av veien, flytte seg ( sjøfart) gjøre fart, få fart
    make way for gi plass til, gå ut av veien for, flytte seg for
    navigate one's way manøvrere seg (frem)
    not by a long way ikke på langt nær
    • he is not the best solicitor in town, not by a long way
    not know which way to turn ikke vite hva man skal ta seg til, ikke vite hvor man skal ta veien, ikke vite verken ut eller inn
    • when I lost my job last year, I didn't know which way to turn
    da jeg mistet jobben i fjor, visste jeg ikke hva jeg skulle ta meg til
    no two ways about it ingen tvil om den saken
    no way! ( hverdagslig) aldri i livet! det er ikke sant!, du tuller!
    one way or another\/the other eller some way or other på en eller annen måte, på ett eller annet vis
    the other way (a)round eller the other way about omvendt, tvert om
    • Adam didn't kiss Sue. It was the other way round. She kissed Adam.
    out of the way bort, unna, utenfor rekkevidde
    avsides uvanlig, original (amer.) upassende, malplassert
    over the way på den andre siden (av gaten), midt i mot
    pay one's (own) way betale for seg, gjøre opp for seg være lønnsom, bære seg
    push one's way trenge seg frem ( overført) slå seg frem, albue seg frem
    put oneself out of the way (for somebody) gjøre seg umak (for noens skyld), anstrenge seg (for noens skyld)
    put somebody in the way of something skaffe noen noe, hjelpe noen med noe, gi noen sjansen til noe
    put somebody out of the way bli kvitt noen, kvitte seg med noen, rydde noen av veien
    put something in the way of someone\/something ( også overført) legge hindringer i noens vei, forhindre noe
    • I know I put something in the way of Sam's career opportunities when I refused to promote him
    see somebody on his\/her way følge noen (på veien), følge noen ut
    set\/put somebody on his\/her way følge noen et stykke på vei(en)
    stand in somebody's way ( også overført) stå i veien for noen, blokkere noen
    start someone on the way hjelpe noen i gang (med noe), følge noen et stykke på vei(en)
    • it was getting dark, so he started me on the way
    det begynte å bli mørkt, så han fulgte meg et stykke på vei
    take one's way ta veien, begi seg
    that's the way it is sånn er livet, slik er det bare
    this way and that hit og dit
    thumb one's way reise på tommelen, haike
    up someone's way ( hverdagslig) oppe hos noen, hjemme hos noen, i noens trakter
    way! eller yes way! (slang, som svar på uttrykket no way!) jeg tuller ikke!, det er sant!
    way in inngang, vei inn
    way of life livsstil, livsførsel, levesett
    way of living levesett, levemåte
    the way of the Cross ( religion) Via dolorosa (veien Jesus gikk til Golgata der han ble korsfestet) forklaring: billedserie med fjorten stasjoner som skildrer Via dolorosa ( overført) en kristens lidelse og selvoppofrelse
    way out utgang, vei ut
    • which is the way out?
    ( overført) utvei
    ways se ➢ ways
    ways and means pengemidler, ressurser ( parlamentarisk) måte (å skaffe seg penger på)
    way to go! (amer., hverdagslig) bra gjort!, kjempebra!, slik skal det gjøres!, sånn ja!
    whichever way you look at it hvordan man enn ser på det, hvordan man enn snur og vender på det
    work one's way arbeide seg frem, bane seg vei
    work one's way into something trykke\/presse seg inn i noe
    work one's way up arbeide seg opp, gjøre karriere
    the wrong way round feil vei, bak frem
    II
    adv. \/weɪ\/ eller away
    1) langt, høyt, veldig
    2) (amer.) altfor
    the way ( irsk) slik at, sånn at, for å
    jeg dro tidlig, slik at jeg unngikk trafikken
    way above ( også overført) skyhøyt over, langt over
    way back when ( hverdagslig) (for) lenge, lenge siden
    • I remember her from school, but that was way back when
    jeg husker henne fra skolen, men det er lenge, lenge siden
    way cool! råbra!
    • the bike is way cool!

    English-Norwegian dictionary > way

  • 18 διά

    διά prep. w. gen. and acc. (Hom.+) (for lit. s. ἀνά, beg.); the fundamental idea that finds expression in this prep. is separation, esp. in the gen., with the gener. sense ‘through’; in the acc. the gener. sense also is ‘through’ (cp. the semantic range in Eng.), but primarily with a causal focus ‘owing to’.
    A. w. gen.
    ① marker of extension through an area or object, via, through
    ⓐ w. verbs of going διέρχεσθαι διὰ πάντων (sc. τόπων, EpArist 132) go through all the places Ac 9:32; cp. Mt 12:43; Lk 11:24. ἀπελεύσομαι διʼ ὑμῶν εἰς I will go through your city on the way to Ro 15:28; cp. 2 Cor. 1:16. διαβαίνειν Hb 11:29. διαπορεύεσθαι διὰ σπορίμων Lk 6:1. εἰσέρχεσθαι διὰ τῆς πύλης (Jos., Ant. 13, 229) Mt 7:13a; τ. θύρας J 10:1f; cp. vs. 9. παρέρχεσθαι διὰ τ. ὁδοῦ pass by along the road Mt 8:28; cp. 7:13b. παραπορεύεσθαι Mk 2:23; 9:30. περιπατεῖν διὰ τοῦ φωτός walk about through or in the light Rv 21:24. ὑποστρέφειν διὰ Μακεδονίας return through M. Ac 20:3.—Ἰης. ὁ ἐλθὼν διʼ ὕδατος καὶ αἵματος 1J 5:6 first of all refers quite literally to Jesus’ passing through water at the hand of John and through blood at his death (on the expression ‘come through blood’ in this sense cp. Eur., Phoen. 20 in Alex. Aphr., Fat. 31 II 2 p. 202, 10, of the oracle to Laius the father of Oedipus, concerning the bloody downfall of his house: πᾶς σὸς οἶκος βήσεται διʼ αἵματος). But mng. 3c may also apply: Jesus comes with the water of baptism and with the blood of redemption for his own.—AKlöpper, 1J 5:6–12: ZWT 43, 1900, 378–400.—The ῥῆμα ἐκπορευόμενον διὰ στόματος θεοῦ Mt 4:4 (Dt 8:3) is simply the word that proceeds out of the mouth of God (cp. Theognis 1, 18 Diehl3 τοῦτʼ ἔπος ἀθανάτων ἦλθε διὰ στομάτων; Pittacus in Diog. L. 1, 78 διὰ στόματος λαλεῖ; Chrysippus argues in Diog. L. 7, 187: εἴ τι λαλεῖς, τοῦτο διὰ τοῦ στόματός σου διέρχεται, i.e. if one e.g. says the word ἅμαξα, a wagon passes through the person’s lips; TestIss 7:4 ψεῦδος οὐκ ἀνῆλθε διὰ τ. χειλέων μου. Cp. also δέχεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν τινος Gen 33:10 beside δέχ. ἐκ τ. χειρ. τινος Ex 32:4).
    ⓑ w. other verbs that include motion: οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος διὰ πασῶν τ. ἐκκλησιῶν (sc. ἀγγέλλεται) throughout all the congregations 2 Cor 8:18. διαφέρεσθαι διʼ (v.l. καθʼ) ὅλης τῆς χώρας be spread through the whole region Ac 13:49. διὰ τ. κεράμων καθῆκαν αὐτόν they let him down through the tile roof Lk 5:19. διὰ τοῦ τείχους καθῆκαν through an opening in the wall (Jos., Ant. 5, 15) Ac 9:25; cp. 2 Cor 11:33. (σωθήσεται) ὡς διὰ πυρός as if he had come through fire 1 Cor 3:15. διασῴζεσθαι διʼ ὕδατος be brought safely through the water 1 Pt 3:20.—διʼ ὅλου J 19:23 s. ὅλος 2.
    ⓐ of a whole period of time, to its very end throughout, through, during διὰ παντός (sc. χρόνου. Edd. gener. write διὰ παντός, but Tdf. writes διαπαντός exc. Mt 18:10) always, continually, constantly (Hdt. 1, 122, 3; Thu. 1, 38, 1; Vett. Val. 220, 1; 16; PLond I, 42, 6 [172 B.C.] p. 30; BGU 1078, 2; PGM 7, 235; LXX; GrBar 10:7; EpArist index; Jos., Ant. 3, 281; SibOr Fgm. 1, 17; Just., D. 6, 2; 12, 3 al.) Mt 18:10; Mk 5:5; Lk 24:53; Ac 2:25 (Ps 15:8); 10:2; 24:16; Ro 11:10 (Ps 68:24); 2 Th 3:16; Hb 9:6; 13:15; Hm 5, 2, 3; Hs 9, 27, 3. διὰ νυκτός during the night, overnight (νύξ 1b) Ac 23:31. διʼ ὅλης νυκτός the whole night through Lk 5:5; J 21:6 v.l. (X., An. 4, 2, 4; Diod S 3, 12, 3 διʼ ὅλης τῆς νυκτός; PGM 4, 3151; Jos., Ant. 6, 37; cp. διʼ ἡμέρας all through the day: IPriene 112, 61 and 99; 1 Macc 12:27; 4 Macc 3:7). διʼ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα Ac 1:3 means either for forty days (Philo, Vi. Cont. 35 διʼ ἓξ ἡμερῶν. So AFridrichsen, ThBl 6, 1927, 337–41; MEnslin, JBL 47, 1928, 60–73) or (s. b below) now and then in the course of 40 days (B-D-F §223, 1; Rob. 581; WMichaelis, ThBl 4, 1925, 102f; Bruce, Acts). διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν throughout the lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ βίου: X., Mem. 1, 2, 61; Pla., Phileb. 39e; Dionys. Hal. 2, 21; διʼ ὅλου τοῦ ζῆν EpArist 130; 141; 168).
    ⓑ of a period of time within which someth. occurs during, at (PTebt 48, 10) διὰ (τῆς) νυκτός at night, during the night (Palaeph. 1, 10; PRyl 138, 15 κατέλαβα τοῦτον διὰ νυκτός; Jos., Bell. 1, 229. S. νύξ 1b end) Ac 5:19; 16:9; 17:10. διὰ τῆς ἡμέρας during the day Lk 9:37 D (Antig. Car. 128 διὰ πέμπτης ἡμέρας=on the fifth day). διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν within three days Mt 26:61; Mk 14:58.
    ⓒ of an interval of time, after (Hdt. 6, 118, 3 διʼ ἐτέων εἴκοσι; Thu. 2, 94, 3; X., Mem. 2, 8, 1; Diod S 5, 28, 6 of transmigration of souls: διʼ ἐτῶν ὡρισμένων [=after the passing of a certain number of years] πάλιν βιοῦν; OGI 56, 38; 4 Macc 13:21; Jos., Ant. 4, 209): διʼ ἐτῶν πλειόνων after several years Ac 24:17. διὰ δεκατεσσάρων (s. under δέκα) ἐτῶν after 14 years Gal 2:1. διʼ ἡμερῶν several days afterward Mk 2:1. διὰ ἱκανοῦ χρόνου after (quite) some time Ac 11:2 D (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 28 διὰ χρόνου).
    ③ marker of instrumentality or circumstance whereby someth. is accomplished or effected, by, via, through
    ⓐ of means or instrument γράφειν διά χάρτου καὶ μέλανος write w. paper and ink 2J 12; cp. 3J 13 (Plut., Sol. 87 [17, 3]). διὰ πυρὸς δοκιμάζειν test by fire 1 Pt 1:7. διὰ χρημάτων κτᾶσθαι Ac 8:20. Hebraistically in expr. denoting activity διὰ χειρῶν τινος (LXX) Mk 6:2; Ac 5:12; 14:3; 19:11, 26. Differently γράφειν διὰ χειρός τινος write through the agency of someone 15:23; cp. 11:30. εἰπεῖν διὰ στόματός τινος by the mouth of someone (where the usage discussed in A1a is influential) 1:16; 3:18, 21; 4:25. εὔσημον λόγον διδόναι διὰ τῆς γλώσσης utter intelligible speech with the tongue 1 Cor 14:9. διὰ τοῦ νοὸς λαλεῖν speak, using one’s reason (=consciously; opp., ecstatic speech) vs. 19 v.l. Of the work of Christ: περιποιεῖσθαι διὰ τοῦ αἵματος obtain through his blood Ac 20:28; cp. Eph 1:7; Col 1:20. Also διὰ τοῦ θανάτου Ro 5:10; Col 1:22; Hb 2:14; διὰ τοῦ σώματος Ro 7:4; διὰ τῆς ἰδίας σαρκός AcPlCor 2:6; cp. 2:15; διὰ τοῦ σταυροῦ Eph 2:16; διὰ τῆς θυσίας Hb 9:26; διὰ τῆς προσφορᾶς τοῦ σώματος Ἰησοῦ through the offering of the body of Jesus 10:10; διὰ παθημάτων 2:10.
    ⓑ of manner, esp. w. verbs of saying: ἀπαγγέλλειν διὰ λόγου by word of mouth Ac 15:27; cp. 2 Th 2:15. διʼ ἐπιστολῶν by letter (POxy 1066, 9; 1070, 14f πολλάκις σοι γράψας διὰ ἐπιστολῶν πολλῶν; Tat. 12:3 δια γραφῆς in writing) 1 Cor 16:3; 2 Cor 10:11; cp. 2 Th 2:2, 15. διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ w. many words Ac 15:32. διʼ ὁράματος εἰπεῖν in a vision 18:9. διὰ παραβολῆς in an illustrative way, in a parable Lk 8:4. διὰ προσευχῆς καὶ δεήσεως προσεύχεσθαι call on (God) w. prayer and supplication Eph 6:18. διὰ βραχέων ἐπιστέλλειν write briefly Hb 13:22 (cp. 1 Pt 5:12 P72; Isocr. 14, 3; Lucian, Tox. 56; EpArist 128; Ath. 17:1 σκέψασθε … διὰ βρ.). Also διʼ ὀλίγων γράφειν 1 Pt 5:12 (Pla., Phileb. 31d; UPZ 42, 9 [162 B.C.]; 2 Macc 6:17).
    ⓒ of attendant or prevailing circumstance (Kühner-G. I 482f; X., Cyr. 4, 6, 6 διὰ πένθους τὸ γῆρας διάγων; Just., D. 105, 2 διʼ οὗ πάθους ἔμελλενἀποθνῄσκειν; PTebt 35, 9 [111 B.C.] διὰ τῆς γνώμης τινός=with someone’s consent; Jos., Bell. 4, 105) σὲ τὸν διὰ γράμματος καὶ περιτομῆς παραβάτην νόμου you who, (though provided) with the written code and circumcision, are a transgressor/violator of the law Ro 2:27. διʼ ὑπομονῆς 8:25. διὰ προσκόμματος eat with offense (to the scruples of another) 14:20. διʼ ἀκροβυστίας in a state of being uncircumcised 4:11. διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων with many tears 2 Cor 2:4. Cp. 6:7. διὰ τῆς ἐπιγνώσεως 2 Pt 1:3 ( through recognition [of God as source of the gifts], s. Danker, Benefactor 457). διὰ πυρός in fiery form AcPlCor 2:13.—Here prob. belongs σωθήσεται διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 Ti 2:15 (opp. of the negative theme in Gen. 3:16), but s. d next. On 1J 5:6 s. A1a above.
    ⓓ of efficient cause via, through διὰ νόμου ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας ( only) recognition of sin comes via the law Ro 3:20; cp. 4:13. τὰ παθήματα τὰ διὰ τοῦ νόμου passions aroused via the law 7:5. διὰ νόμου πίστεως by the law of faith 3:27; Gal 2:19. ἀφορμὴν λαμβάνειν διὰ τῆς ἐντολῆς Ro 7:8, 11; cp. 13. διὰ τ. εὐαγγελίου ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα (spiritual parenthood) 1 Cor 4:15. Perh. 1 Ti 2:15 but s. c, above. διὰ τῆς σοφίας with its wisdom 1 Cor 1:21; opp. διὰ τῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος through the folly of proclamation = foolish proclamation ibid. διὰ τῆς Λευιτικῆς ἱερωσύνης Hb 7:11. Freq. διὰ (τῆς) πίστεως Ro 1:12; 3:22, 25, 30f; Gal 2:16; 3:14, 26; Eph 2:8; 3:12, 17 al. Cp. AcPl Cor 2:8. πίστις διʼ ἀγάπης ἐνεργουμένη faith which works through (=expresses itself in) deeds of love Gal 5:6. διὰ θελήματος θεοῦ if God is willing Ro 15:32; by the will of God 1 Cor 1:1; 2 Cor 1:1; 8:5; Eph 1:1; Col 1:1; 2 Ti 1:1.
    ⓔ of occasion διὰ τῆς χάριτος by virtue of the grace Ro 12:3; Gal 1:15 (Just., D. 100, 2).—3:18; 4:23; Phlm 22. διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀρετῆς in consequence of his glory and excellence 2 Pt 1:3 v.l.
    ⓕ in wording of urgent requests διὰ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν τοῦ θεοῦ by the mercy of God Ro 12:1; cp. 15:30; 1 Cor 1:10; 2 Cor 10:1.
    ④ marker of pers. agency, through, by
    ⓐ with focus on agency through ( the agency of), by (X., An. 2, 3, 17 διʼ ἑρμηνέως λέγειν; Menand., Fgm. 210, 1 οὐθεὶς διʼ ἀνθρώπου θεὸς σῴζει … ἑτέρου τόν ἕτερον; Achilles Tat. 7, 1, 3 διʼ ἐκείνου μαθεῖν; Just., D. 75, 4 διὰ παρθένου γεννηθῆναι; PMert 5, 8 γεομετρηθῆναι διʼ αὐτοῦ) ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Mt 1:22; 2:15, 23; 4:14 al. (cp. Just., A I, 47, 5 διὰ Ἠσαίου τοῦ πρ.). γεγραμμένα διὰ τῶν προφητῶν Lk 18:31; cp. Ac 2:22; 10:36; 15:12 al. διʼ ἀνθρώπου by human agency Gal 1:1. διὰ Μωϋσέως through Moses (Jos., Ant. 7, 338; Mel., P. 11, 77 διὰ χειρὸς Μωυσέως) J 1:17; under Moses’ leadership Hb 3:16. διʼ ἀγγέλων by means of divine messengers (TestJob 18:5 διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 136, but s. n. by RMarcus, Loeb ed., ad loc.) Gal 3:19; Hb 2:2. πέμψας διὰ τ. μαθητῶν εἶπεν sent and said through his disciples Mt 11:2f. Cp. the short ending of Mk. γράφειν διά τινος of the bearer IRo 10:1; IPhld 11:2; ISm 12:1, but also of pers. who had a greater or smaller part in drawing up some document (Dionys. of Cor. in Eus., HE 4, 23, 11) 1 Pt 5:12 (on the practice s. ERichards, The Secretary in the Letters of Paul ’91). In this case διά comes close to the mng. represented by (LWenger, D. Stellvertretung im Rechte d. Pap. 1906, 9ff; Dssm., LO 98 [LAE 123f]). So also κρίνει ὁ θεὸς διὰ Χρ. Ἰ. God judges, represented by Christ Jesus Ro 2:16. Christ as intermediary in the creation of the world J 1:3, 10; 1 Cor 8:6; Col 1:16.—εὐχαριστεῖν τ. θεῷ διὰ Ἰ. Χρ. thank God through Jesus Christ Ro 1:8; 7:25; Col 3:17.—Occasionally the mediation becomes actual presence (references for this usage in BKeil, Anonymus Argentinensis 1902, p. 192, 1; 306 note) διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων in the presence of many witnesses 2 Ti 2:2 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 114, 31 διὰ θεοῦ μέσου=in the presence of God as mediator; Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 187 τὸ διὰ μαρτύρων κλαίειν=weeping in the presence of witnesses).
    ⓑ with focus on the originator of an action (Hom. et al.; pap, LXX, EpArist)
    α. of human activity (PSI 354, 6 [254 B.C.] τὸν χόρτον τὸν συνηγμένον διʼ ἡμῶν=by us; 500, 5; 527, 12; 1 Esdr 6:13; 2 Macc 6:21; 4 Macc 1:11) 2 Cor 1:11 (where διὰ πολλῶν resumes ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων). ᾧ παρέλαβε κανόνι διὰ τῶν μακαρίων προφήτων καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου εὐαγγελίου AcPlCor 2:36.
    β. of divine activity:—of God (Aeschyl., Ag. 1485; Pla., Symp. 186e ἡ ἰατρικὴ πᾶσα διὰ τ. θεοῦ τούτου [Asclepius] κυβερνᾶται; Ael. Aristid., Sarap. [Or. 8 Dind.=45 Keil] 14 K. πάντα γὰρ πανταχοῦ διὰ σοῦ τε καὶ διὰ σὲ ἡμῖν γίγνεται; Zosimus in CALG p. 143 and a magic ring in introd. 133; EpArist 313) 1 Cor 1:9 διʼ οὗ ἐκλήθητε (v.l. ὑπό s. καλέω 4); Ro 11:36 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 240–50; 347f); Hb 2:10b (s. B 2a, below; cp. Ar. 1:5 διʼ αὐτοῦ … τὰ πάντα συνέστηκεν).—Of Christ Ro 1:5; 5:9, 17f, 21; 8:37; 2 Cor 1:20 al. (ASchettler, D. paulin. Formel ‘durch Christus’ 1907; GJonker, De paulin. formule ‘door Christus’: ThSt 27, 1909, 173–208).—Of the Holy Spirit Ac 11:28; 21:4; Ro 5:5.
    ⑤ At times διά w. gen. seems to have causal mng. (Rdm. 142; POxy 299, 2 [I A.D.] ἔδωκα αὐτῷ διὰ σοῦ=because of you; Achilles Tat. 3, 4, 5 διὰ τούτων=for this reason; in Eng. cp. Coleridge, Anc. Mariner 135–36: Every tongue thro’ utter drouth Was wither’d at the root, s. OED s.v. ‘through’ I B 8) διὰ τῆς σαρκός because of the resistance of the flesh Ro 8:3.—2 Cor 9:13.—On the use of διά w. gen. in Ro s. Schlaeger, La critique radicale de l’épître aux Rom.: Congr. d’ Hist. du Christ. II 111f.
    B. w. acc.
    ① marker of extension through an area, through (Hom. and other early Gk. only in poetry, e.g. Pind. P. 9, 123 διʼ ὅμιλον ‘through the throng’; Hellenistic prose since Dionys. Hal. [JKäser, D. Präpositionen b. Dionys. Hal., diss. Erlangen 1915, 54]; ISyriaW 1866b τὸν πάτρωνα διὰ πάντα of the governor of a whole province) διήρχετο διὰ μέσον Σαμαρείας καὶ Γαλιλαίας Lk 17:11 (cp. SibOr 3, 316 ῥομφαία διελεύσεται διὰ μέσον σεῖο).
    ② marker of someth. constituting cause
    ⓐ the reason why someth. happens, results, exists: because of, for the sake of (do something for the sake of a divinity: UPZ 62, 2 [161 B.C.] διὰ τὸν Σάραπιν; JosAs 1:10 διʼ αὐτήν; ApcSed 3:3 διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον; Tat. 8:2 διὰ τὸν … Ἄττιν; Ath. 30, 1 διὰ τὴν Δερκετώ) hated because of the name Mt 10:22; persecution arises because of teaching 13:21; because of unbelief vs. 58; because of a tradition 15:3; διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον (the sabbath was designed) for people Mk 2:27; because of Herodias Mk 6:17 (cp. Just. D. 34, 8 διὰ γυναῖκα); because of a crowd Lk 5:19; 8:19 al; because of Judeans Ac 16:3. διὰ τὸν θόρυβον 21:34; because of rain 28:2. Juristically to indicate guilt: imprisoned for insurrection and murder Lk 23:25. διʼ ὑμᾶς on your account=through your fault Ro 2:24 (Is 52:5). διὰ τὴν πάρεσιν because of the passing over 3:25 (but s. WKümmel, ZTK 49, ’52, 164). διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα on account of transgressions 4:25a (cp. Is 53:5; PsSol 13:5); but διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν in the interest of justification vs. 25b; s. 8:10 for a sim. paired use of διὰ. διὰ τὴν χάριν on the basis of the grace 15:15. διʼ ἀσθένειαν τῆς σαρκός because of a physical ailment (cp. POxy 726, 10f [II A.D.] οὐ δυνάμενος διʼ ἀσθένειαν πλεῦσαι. Cp. ἀσθένεια 1) Gal 4:13. διὰ τὸ θέλημα σου by your will Rv 4:11. διὰ τὸν χρόνον according to the time = by this time Hb 5:12 (Aelian, VH 3, 37 δ. τὸν χρ.=because of the particular time-situation).—W. words denoting emotions out of (Diod S 5, 59, 8 διὰ τὴν λύπην; 18, 25, 1 διὰ τὴν προπέτειαν=out of rashness; Appian, Celt. 1 §9 διʼ ἐλπίδα; 2 Macc 5:21; 7:20; 9:8; 3 Macc 5:32, 41; Tob 8:7): διὰ φθόνον out of envy Mt 27:18; Phil 1:15. διὰ σπλάγχνα ἐλέους out of tender mercy Lk 1:78. διὰ τ. φόβον τινός out of fear of someone J 7:13. διὰ τὴν πολλὴν ἀγάπην out of the great love Eph 2:4. διὰ τ. πλεονεξίαν in their greediness B 10:4.—Of God as the ultimate goal or purpose of life, whereas διά w. gen. (s. A4bβ above) represents God as Creator, Hb 2:10a (s. Norden, op. cit.; PGM 13, 76 διὰ σὲ συνέστηκεν … ἡ γῆ). Cp. J 6:57 (s. Bultmann ad loc.) PtK 2.
    ⓑ in direct questions διὰ τί; why? (Hyperid. 3, 17; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 28; Ael. Aristid. 31 p. 597 D.; oft. LXX; TestJob 37:8; TestLevi 2:9; GrBar, Tat; Mel., Fgm. 8b, 42) mostly in an interrogative clause Mt 9:11, 14; 13:10; 15:2f; 17:19; 21:25; Mk 2:18; 11:31; Lk 5:30; 19:23, 31; 20:5; 24:38; J 7:45; 8:43, 46; 12:5; 13:37; Ac 5:3; 1 Cor 6:7; Rv 17:7. Simply διὰ τί; (Hyperid. 3, 23) Ro 9:32; 2 Cor 11:11. Also διατί (always in t.r. and often by Tdf.; TestJob 46:2) B 8:4, 6; Hm 2:5; Hs 5, 5, 5. Kvan Leeuwen Boomkamp, Τι et Διατι dans les évangiles: RevÉtGr 39, 1926, 327–31.—In real and supposed answers and inferences διὰ τοῦτο therefore (X., An. 1, 7, 3; 7, 19; oft. LXX; JosAs 7:7; Ar. 12, 2; Just., A I, 44, 5 al.; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac.) Mt 6:25; 12:27, 31; 13:13, 52; 14:2; 18:23; 21:43; 23:13 v.l.; 24:44; Mk 11:24; 12:24; Lk 11:19 al. Also διὰ ταῦτα (Epict.) Eph 5:6. διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι for this reason, (namely) that J 5:16, 18; 8:47; 10:17; 12:18, 39; 15:19; 1J 3:1. διὰ τοῦτο ἵνα for this reason, (in order) that (Lucian, Abdic. 1) J 1:31; 2 Cor 13:10; 1 Ti 1:16; Phlm 15. Also διὰ τοῦτο ὅπως Hb 9:15.
    ⓒ διά foll. by inf. or acc. w. inf., representing a causal clause, because (Gen 39:9; Dt 1:36; 1 Macc 6:53; GrBar 8:4; Demetr.: 722 fgm 1:1 al.) διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν βάθος because it had no depth Mt 13:5f; Mk 4:5f (διὰ τὸ μή w. inf.: X., Mem. 1, 3, 5; Hero Alex. I 348, 7; III 274, 19; Lucian, Hermot. 31); because lawlessness increases Mt 24:12; διὰ τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐξ οἴκου Δ.. Lk 2:4; because it was built well 6:48 al. διὰ τὸ λέγεσθαι ὑπό τινων because it was said by some Lk 9:7 (for the constr. cp. Herodian 7, 12, 7 διὰ τὸ τὰς ἐξόδους ὑπὸ τ. πυρὸς προκατειλῆφθαι=because the exit-routes were blocked by the fire).
    ⓓ instead of διά w. gen. to denote the efficient cause we may have διά, by
    α. w. acc. of thing (schol. on Pind., N. 4, 79a; 2 Macc 12:11; EpArist 77) διὰ τὸ αἷμα by the blood Rv 12:11. διὰ τὰ σημεῖα by the miracles 13:14.
    β. w. acc. of pers. and freq. as expr. of favorable divine action (Aristoph., Plut. 468; Dionys. Hal. 8, 33, 3, 1579 μέγας διὰ τ. θεούς ἐγενόμην; Ael. Aristid. 24, 1 K.=44 p. 824 D.: διʼ οὓς [= θεούς] ἐσώθην; SIG 1122; OGI 458, 40; PGM 13, 579 διῳκονομήθη τ. πάντα διὰ σέ; EpArist 292; Sir 15:11; 3 Macc 6:36: other exx. in SEitrem and AFridrichsen, E. christl. Amulett auf Pap. 1921, 24). ζῶ διὰ τὸν πατέρα J 6:57 (cp. PKöln VI, 245, 16 of Isis σὺ κυρεῖς τὰ πάντα, διὰ σὲ δʼ εἰσορῶ φαός ‘you are responsible for everything and thanks to you I can see light’). διὰ τὸν ὑποτάξαντα by the one who subjected it Ro 8:20.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > διά

  • 19 πνεῦμα

    πνεῦμα, ατος, τό (πνέω; Aeschyl., Pre-Socr., Hdt.+. On the history of the word s. Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3 308ff).
    ① air in movement, blowing, breathing (even the glowing exhalations of a volcanic crater: Diod S 5, 7, 3)
    ⓐ wind (Aeschyl. et al.; LXX, EpArist, Philo; Jos., Ant. 2, 343; 349; SibOr 8, 297) in wordplay τὸ πνεῦμα πνεῖ the wind blows J 3:8a (EpJer 60 πνεῦμα ἐν πάσῃ χώρᾳ πνεῖ. But s. TDonn, ET 66, ’54f, 32; JThomas, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 219–24). ὀθόνη πλοίου ὑπὸ πνεύματος πληρουμένη MPol 15:2. Of God ὁ ποιῶν τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ πνεύματα who makes his angels winds Hb 1:7; 1 Cl 36:3 (both Ps 103:4).
    ⓑ the breathing out of air, blowing, breath (Aeschyl. et al.; Pla., Tim. 79b; LXX) ὁ ἄνομος, ὅν ὁ κύριος Ἰησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 2 Th 2:8 (cp. Is 11:4; Ps 32:6).
    ② that which animates or gives life to the body, breath, (life-)spirit (Aeschyl. et al.; Phoenix of Colophon 1, 16 [Coll. Alex. p. 231] πν.=a breathing entity [in contrast to becoming earth in death]; Polyb. 31, 10, 4; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 4 p. 394b, 8ff; PHib 5, 54 [III B.C.]; PGM 4, 538; 658; 2499; LXX; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 19 [Stone p. 44] al.; JosAs 19:3; SibOr 4, 46; Tat. 4:2) ἀφιέναι τὸ πνεῦμα give up one’s spirit, breathe one’s last (Eur., Hec. 571; Porphyr., Vi. Plotini 2) Mt 27:50. J says for this παραδιδόναι τὸ πν. 19:3 (cp. ApcMos 31 ἀποδῶ τὸ πν.; Just., D. 105, 5). Of the return of the (life-)spirit of a deceased person into her dead body ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πν. αὐτῆς Lk 8:55 (cp. Jdg 15:19). εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ πν. μου into your hands I entrust my spirit 23:46 (Ps 30:6; for alleged focus on ἐλπίζειν s. EBons, BZ 38, ’94, 93–101). κύριε Ἰησοῦ, δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου Ac 7:59; composite of both passages AcPl Ha 10, 23 (cp. ApcMos 42). τὸ πν. μου ὁ δεσπότης δέξεται GJs 23:3 (on the pneuma flying upward after death cp. Epicharm. in Vorsokrat. 23 [=13, 4th ed.], B 9 and 22; Eur., Suppl. 533 πνεῦμα μὲν πρὸς αἰθέρα, τὸ σῶμα δʼ ἐς γῆν; PGM 1, 177ff τελευτήσαντός σου τὸ σῶμα περιστελεῖ, σοῦ δὲ τὸ πνεῦμα … εἰς ἀέρα ἄξει σὺν αὑτῷ ‘when you are dead [the angel] will wrap your body … and take your spirit with him into the sky’). τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πν. νεκρόν ἐστιν Js 2:26. πν. ζωῆς ἐκ τ. θεοῦ εἰσῆλθεν ἐν αὐτοῖς (i.e. the prophet-witnesses who have been martyred) Rv 11:11 (cp. Ezk 37:10 v.l. εἰσῆλθεν εἰς αὐτοὺς πνεῦμα ζωῆς; vs. 5). Of the spirit that animated the image of a beast, and enabled it to speak and to have Christians put to death 13:15.—After a person’s death, the πν. lives on as an independent being, in heaven πνεύματα δικαὶων τετελειωμένων Hb 12:23 (cp. Da 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον). According to non-biblical sources, the πν. are in the netherworld (cp. En 22:3–13; Sib Or 7, 127) or in the air (PGM 1, 178), where evil spirits can prevent them from ascending higher (s. ἀήρ2b). τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν πορευθεὶς ἐκήρυξεν 1 Pt 3:19 belongs here if it refers to Jesus’ preaching to the spirits of the dead confined in Hades (so Usteri et al.; s. also JMcCulloch, The Harrowing of Hell, 1930), whether it be when he descended into Hades, or when he returned to heaven (so RBultmann, Bekenntnis u. Liedfragmente im 1 Pt: ConNeot11, ’47, 1–14).—CClemen, Niedergefahren zu den Toten 1900; JTurmel, La Descente du Christ aux enfers 1905; JMonnier, La Descente aux enfers 1906; HHoltzmann, ARW 11, 1908, 285–97; KGschwind, Die Niederfahrt Christi in die Unterwelt 1911; DPlooij, De Descensus in 1 Pt 3:19 en 4:6: TT 47, 1913, 145–62; JBernard, The Descent into Hades a Christian Baptism (on 1 Pt 3:19ff): Exp. 8th ser., 11, 1916, 241–74; CSchmidt, Gespräche Jesu mit seinen Jüngern: TU 43, 1919, 452ff; JFrings, BZ 17, 1926, 75–88; JKroll, Gott u. Hölle ’32; RGanschinietz, Katabasis: Pauly-W. X/2, 1919, 2359–449; Clemen2 89–96; WBieder, Die Vorstellung v. d. Höllenfahrt Jesu Chr. ’49; SJohnson, JBL 79, ’60, 48–51; WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits ’65. S. also the lit. in Windisch, Hdb.2 1930, exc. on 1 Pt 3:20; ESelwyn, The First Ep. of St. Peter ’46 and 4c below.—This is prob. also the place for θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ ζωοποιηθεὶς δὲ πνεύματι• ἐν ᾧ καὶ … 1 Pt 3:18f (some mss. read πνεύματι instead of πνεύμασιν in vs. 19, evidently in ref. to the manner of Jesus’ movement; πνεῦμα is that part of Christ which, in contrast to σάρξ, did not pass away in death, but survived as an individual entity after death; s. ἐν 7). Likew. the contrast κατὰ σάρκα … κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 1:3f. Cp. 1 Ti 3:16.
    ③ a part of human personality, spirit
    ⓐ when used with σάρξ, the flesh, it denotes the immaterial part 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5. Flesh and spirit=the whole personality, in its outer and inner aspects, oft. in Ign.: IMg 1:2; 13:1a; ITr ins; 12:1; IRo ins; ISm 1:1; IPol 5:1; AcPl Ant 13, 18 (=Aa I 237, 3).—In the same sense beside σῶμα, the body (Simplicius, In Epict. p. 50, 1; Ps.-Phoc. 106f; PGM 1, 178) 1 Cor 5:3–5; 7:34.—The inner life of humans is divided into ψυχὴ καὶ πνεῦμα (cp. Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 10 p. 370c τὶ θεῖον ὄντως ἐνῆν πνεῦμα τῇ ψυχῇ=a divine spirit was actually in the soul; Wsd 15:11; Jos., Ant. 1, 34; Tat. 13, 2; 15, 1 et al.; Ath. 27, 1. S. also Herm. Wr. 10, 13; 16f; PGM 4, 627; 630. ἐκ τριῶν συνεστάναι λέγουσι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐκ ψυχῆς καὶ σώματος καὶ πνεύματος Did., Gen. 55, 14) Hb 4:12. Cp. Phil 1:27. τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Th 5:23 (s. GMilligan, Thess. 1908, 78f; EvDobschütz in Meyer X7 1909, 230ff; EBurton, Spirit, Soul, and Flesh 1918; AFestugière, La Trichotomie des 1 Th 5:23 et la Philos. gr.: RSR 20, 1930, 385–415; CMasson, RTP 33, ’45, 97–102; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 161–66). σαρκί, ψυχῇ, πνεύματι IPhld 11:2.
    ⓑ as the source and seat of insight, feeling, and will, gener. as the representative part of human inner life (cp. PGM 4, 627; 3 Km 20:5; Sir 9:9 al.; Just., D. 30, 1; Did., Gen. 232, 5) ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ Mk 2:8. ἀναστενάξας τῷ πν. αὐτοῦ λέγει 8:12 (s. ἀναστενάζω). ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πν. μου Lk 1:47 (in parallelism w. ψυχή vs. 46, as Sir 9:9). ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πν. 10:21 v.l., Ἰησοῦς ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πν. J 11:33 (s. ἐμβριμάομαι 3); Ἰης. ἐταράχθη τῷ πν. 13:21. παρωξύνετο τὸ πν. αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ Ac 17:16; ζέων τῷ πν. with spirit-fervor 18:25 (s. ζέω). τὸ παιδίον ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι Lk 1:80; 2:40 v.l.; ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ πν. Paul made up his mind Ac 19:21 (some would put this pass. in 6c, but cp. Lk 1:66 and analogous formulations Hom. et al. in L-S-J-M s.v. τίθημι A6). προσκυνήσουσιν τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι of the spiritual, i.e. the pure, inner worship of God, that has nothing to do w. holy times, places, appurtenances, or ceremonies J 4:23; cp. vs. 24b. πν. συντετριμμένον (Ps 50:19) 1 Cl 18:17; 52:4.—2 Cl 20:4; Hv 3, 12, 2; 3, 13, 2.—This usage is also found in Paul. His conviction (s. 5 below) that the Christian possesses the (divine) πνεῦμα and thus is different fr. all other people, leads him to choose this word in preference to others, in order to characterize a believer’s inner being gener. ᾧ λατρεύω ἐν τῷ πν. μου Ro 1:9. οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πν. μου 2 Cor 2:13. Cp. 7:13. As a matter of fact, it can mean simply a person’s very self or ego: τὸ πνεῦμα συμμαρτυρεῖ τῷ πνεύματι ἡμῶν the Spirit (of God) bears witness to our very self Ro 8:16 (cp. PGM 12, 327 ἠκούσθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπὸ πνεύματος οὐρανοῦ). ἀνέπαυσαν τὸ ἐμὸν πν. καὶ τὸ ὑμῶν they have refreshed both me and you 1 Cor 16:18. ἡ χάρις τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χρ. μετά τοῦ πν. (ὑμῶν) Gal 6:18; Phil 4:23; Phlm 25. Cp. 2 Ti 4:22. Likew. in Ign. τὸ ἐμὸν πν. my (unworthy) self IEph 18:1; IRo 9:3; cp. 1 Cor 2:11a—On the relation of the divine Spirit to the believer’s spiritual self, s. SWollenweider, Der Geist Gottes als Selbst der Glaubenden: ZTK 93, ’96, 163–92.—Only a part of the inner life, i.e. that which concerns the will, is meant in τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. That which is inferior, anxiety, fear of suffering, etc. is attributed to the σάρξ.—The mng. of the expr. οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύματι Mt 5:3 is difficult to determine w. certainty (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a πένης ἀνὴρ τὴν ψυχήν. The dat. as τῇ ψυχῇ M. Ant. 6, 52; 8, 51). The sense is prob. those who are poor in their inner life, because they do not have a misdirected pride in their own spiritual riches (s. AKlöpper, Über den Sinn u. die ursprgl. Form der ersten Seligpreisung der Bergpredigt bei Mt: ZWT 37, 1894, 175–91; RKabisch, Die erste Seligpreisung: StKr 69, 1896, 195–215; KKöhler, Die ursprgl. Form der Seligpreisungen: StKr 91, 1918, 157–92; JBoehmer, De Schatkamer 17, 1923, 11–16, TT [Copenhagen] 4, 1924, 195–207, JBL 45, 1926, 298–304; WMacgregor, ET 39, 1928, 293–97; VMacchioro, JR 12, ’32, 40–49; EEvans, Theology 47, ’44, 55–60; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 134ff; Betz, SM 116 n. 178 for Qumran reff.).
    ⓒ spiritual state, state of mind, disposition ἐν ἀγάπῃ πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος with love and a gentle spirit 1 Cor 4:21; cp. Gal 6:1. τὸ πν. τοῦ νοὸς ὑμῶν Eph 4:23 (s. νοῦς 2a). ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος with the imperishable (gift) of a quiet disposition 1 Pt 3:4.
    ④ an independent noncorporeal being, in contrast to a being that can be perceived by the physical senses, spirit (ELangton, Good and Evil Spirits ’42).
    ⓐ God personally: πνεῦμα ὁ θεός J 4:24a (Ath. 16, 2; on God as a spirit, esp. in the Stoa, s. MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48/49. Hdb. ad loc. Also Celsus 6, 71 [Stoic]; Herm. Wr. 18, 3 ἀκάματον μέν ἐστι πνεῦμα ὁ θεός).
    ⓑ good, or at least not expressly evil spirits or spirit-beings (cp. CIG III, 5858b δαίμονες καὶ πνεύματα; Proclus on Pla., Cratyl. p. 69, 6; 12 Pasqu.; En 15:4; 6; 8; 10; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 15f [Stone p. 10, 15f] πάντα τὰ ἐπουράνια πνεύματα; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82] ὑψηλὸν πν.; PGM 3, 8 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, ἱερὸν πνεῦμα; 4, 1448; 3080; 12, 249) πνεῦμα w. ἄγγελος (cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 108; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 3, 33; 8, 12) Ac 23:8f. God is ὁ παντὸς πνεύματος κτίστης καὶ ἐπίσκοπος 1 Cl 59:3b.—Pl., God the μόνος εὐεργέτης πνεύματων 1 Cl 59:3a. Cp. 64 (s. on this Num 16:22; 27:16. Prayers for vengeance fr. Rheneia [Dssm., LO 351–55=LAE 423ff=SIG 1181, 2] τὸν θεὸν τὸν κύριον τῶν πνευμάτων; PGM 5, 467 θεὸς θεῶν, ὁ κύριος τῶν πν.; sim. the magic pap PWarr 21, 24; 26 [III A.D.]); the πατὴρ τῶν πνευμάτων Hb 12:9. Intermediary beings (in polytheistic terminology: δαίμονες) that serve God are called λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα Hb 1:14. In Rv we read of the ἑπτὰ πνεύματα (τοῦ θεοῦ) 1:4; 3:1; 4:5; 5:6; s. ASkrinjar, Biblica 16, ’35, 1–24; 113–40.— Ghost Lk 24:37, 39.
    ⓒ evil spirits (PGM 13, 798; 36, 160; TestJob 27, 2; ApcSed [both Satan]; AscIs 3:28; Just., D. 39, 6 al.; Ath. 25, 3), esp. in accounts of healing in the Synoptics: (τὸ) πνεῦμα (τὸ) ἀκάθαρτον (Just., D. 82, 3) Mt 12:43; Mk 1:23, 26; 3:30; 5:2, 8; 7:25; 9:25a; Lk 8:29; 9:42; 11:24; Rv 18:2. Pl. (TestBenj 5:2) Mt 10:1; Mk 1:27; 3:11; 5:13; 6:7; Lk 4:36; 6:18; Ac 5:16; 8:7; Rv 16:13; ending of Mk in the Freer ms.—τὸ πν. τὸ πονηρόν Ac 19:15f. Pl. (En 99:7; TestSim 4:9; 6:6, TestJud 16:1; Just., D. 76, 6) Lk 7:21; 8:2; Ac 19:12f.—πν. ἄλαλον Mk 9:17; cp. vs. 25b (s. ἄλαλος). πν. πύθων Ac 16:16 (s. πύθων). πν. ἀσθενείας Lk 13:11. Cp. 1 Ti 4:1b. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου (s. δαιμόνιον 2) Lk 4:33. πνεύματα δαιμονίων Rv 16:14 (in effect = personified ‘exhalations’ of evil powers; for the combination of πν. and δαιμ. cp. the love spell Sb 4324, 16f τὰ πνεύματα τῶν δαιμόνων τούτων).—Abs. of a harmful spirit Mk 9:20; Lk 9:39; Ac 16:18. Pl. Mt 8:16; 12:45; Lk 10:20; 11:26.—1 Pt 3:19 (s. 2 above) belongs here if the πνεύματα refer to hostile spirit-powers, evil spirits, fallen angels (so FSpitta, Christi Predigt an die Geister 1890; HGunkel, Zum religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 72f; WBousset, ZNW 19, 1920, 50–66; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919, 25ff; Knopf, Windisch, FHauck ad loc.; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism ’46, esp. 54–56, 69).—Hermas also has the concept of evil spirits that lead an independent existence, and live and reign within the inner life of a pers.; the Holy Spirit, who also lives or would like to live there, is forced out by them (cp. TestDan 4) Hm 5, 1, 2–4; 5, 2, 5–8; 10, 1, 2. τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον … ἕτερον πονηρὸν πν. 5, 1, 2. These πνεύματα are ὀξυχολία 5, 1, 3; 5, 2, 8 (τὸ πονηρότατον πν.); 10, 1, 2; διψυχία 9:11 (ἐπίγειον πν. ἐστι παρὰ τοῦ διαβόλου); 10, 1, 2; λύπη 10, 1, 2 (πάντων τῶν πνευμάτων πονηροτέρα) and other vices. On the complicated pneuma-concept of the Mandates of Hermas s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Hm 5, 2, 7; cp. Leutzsch, Hermas 453f n. 133.
    ⑤ God’s being as controlling influence, with focus on association with humans, Spirit, spirit as that which differentiates God fr. everything that is not God, as the divine power that produces all divine existence, as the divine element in which all divine life is carried on, as the bearer of every application of the divine will. All those who belong to God possess or receive this spirit and hence have a share in God’s life. This spirit also serves to distinguish Christians fr. all unbelievers (cp. PGM 4, 1121ff, where the spirit is greeted as one who enters devotees and, in accordance w. God’s will, separates them fr. themselves, i.e. fr. the purely human part of their nature); for this latter aspect s. esp. 6 below.
    ⓐ the Spirit of God, of the Lord (=God) etc. (LXX; TestSim 4:4; JosAs 8:11; ApcSed 14:6; 15:6; ApcMos 43; SibOr 3, 701; Ps.-Phoc. 106; Philo; Joseph. [s. c below]; apolog. Cp. Plut., Numa 4, 6 πνεῦμα θεοῦ, capable of begetting children; s. παρθένος a) τὸ πν. τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:11b, 14; 3:16; 6:11; 1J 4:2a (Just., D. 49, 3; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 22, 3). τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ πν. 1 Pt 4:14 (Just., A I, 60, 6). τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12b. τὸ πν. κυρίου Ac 5:9; B 6:14; B 9:2 (cp. Mel., P. 32, 222). τὸ πνεῦμά μου or αὐτοῦ: Mt 12:18 (Is 42:1); Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f.—Cp. 1QS 4:21); 1 Cor 2:10a v.l.; Eph 3:16; 1 Th 4:8 (where τὸ ἅγιον is added); 1J 4:13.—τὸ πν. τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν Mt 10:20. τὸ πν. τοῦ ἐγείραντος τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ro 8:11a.—Without the art. πν. θεοῦ (JosAs 4:9; Tat. 15:3; Theoph. Ant. 1, 5 [p. 66, 18]) the Spirit of God Mt 3:16; 12:28; Ro 8:9b, 14, 19; 1 Cor 7:40; 12:3a; 2 Cor 3:3 (πν. θεοῦ ζῶντος); Phil 3:3. πν. κυρίου Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39 (like J 3:8; 20:22; Ac 2:4, this pass. belongs on the borderline betw. the mngs. ‘wind’ and ‘spirit’; cp. Diod S 3, 60, 3 Ἕσπερον ἐξαίφνης ὑπὸ πνευμάτων συναρπαγέντα μεγάλων ἄφαντον γενέσθαι ‘Hesperus [a son of Atlas] was suddenly snatched by strong winds and vanished fr. sight’. S. HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919, 19ff; OCullmann, TZ. 4, ’48, 364); 1 Cl 21:2.
    ⓑ the Spirit of Christ, of the Lord (=Christ) etc. τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ Ac 16:7. τὸ πν. Χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:32. τὸ ἐν αὐτοῖς πν. Χριστοῦ 1 Pt 1:11. πν. Χριστοῦ Ro 8:9c. πν. τοῦ Χριστοῦ AcPl Ha 8, 18. ἀπὸ τοῦ πν. τοῦ χριστοῦ AcPlCor 2:10. τὸ πν. Ἰης. Χριστοῦ Phil 1:19. τὸ πν. κυρίου 2 Cor 3:17b (JHermann, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61). τὸ πν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ (=θεοῦ) Gal 4:6. As possessor of the divine Spirit, and at the same time controlling its distribution among humans, Christ is called κύριος πνεύματος Lord of the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18 (s. Windisch ad loc.); but many prefer to transl. from the Lord who is the Spirit.—CMoule, OCullmann Festschr., ’72, 231–37.
    ⓒ Because of its heavenly origin and nature this Spirit is called (the) Holy Spirit (cp. PGM 4, 510 ἵνα πνεύσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸ ἱερὸν πνεῦμα.—Neither Philo nor Josephus called the Spirit πν. ἅγιον; the former used θεῖον or θεοῦ πν., the latter πν. θεῖον: Ant. 4, 118; 8, 408; 10, 239; but ἅγιον πνεῦμα Orig. C. Cels 1, 40, 16).
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον (Is 63:10f; Ps 50:13; 142:10 v.l.; cp. Sus 45 Theod.; TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 10 [Stone p. 10]; JosAs 8:11 [codd. ADE]; AscIs 3, 15, 26; Just., D. 36, 6 al.) Mt 12:32 = Mk 3:29 = Lk 12:10 (τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα; on the ‘sin against the Holy Spirit’ s. HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 96–112; AFridrichsen, Le péché contre le Saint-Esprit: RHPR 3, 1923, 367–72). Mk 12:36; 13:11; Lk 2:26; 3:22; 10:21; J 14:26; Ac 1:16; 2:33; 5:3, 32; 7:51; 8:18 v.l.; 10:44, 47; 11:15; 13:2; 15:8, 28; 19:6; 20:23, 28; 21:11; 28:25; Eph 1:13 (τὸ πν. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τὸ ἅγιον); 4:30 (τὸ πν. τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ θεοῦ); Hb 3:7; 9:8; 10:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 16:2; 18:11 (Ps 50:13); 22:1; IEph 9:1; Hs 5, 5, 2; 5, 6, 5–7 (on the relationship of the Holy Spirit to the Son in Hermas s. ALink, Christi Person u. Werk im Hirten des Hermas 1886; JvWalter, ZNW 14, 1913, 133–44; MDibelius, Hdb. exc. following Hs 5, 6, 8 p. 572–76).—τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα (Wsd 9:17; OdeSol 11:2; TestJob 51:2; ApcEsdr 7:16; Just. D. 25, 1 al.) Mt 28:19; Lk 12:10 (s. above), 12; Ac 1:8; 2:38 (epexegetic gen.); 4:31; 9:31; 10:45; 13:4; 16:6; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 13:13; 1J 5:7 v.l. (on the Comma Johanneum s. λόγο 3); GJs 24:4 (s. χρηματίζω 1bα). As the mother of Jesus GHb 20, 61 (HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion 1922, 64ff; SHirsch, D. Vorstellg. v. e. weibl. πνεῦμα ἅγ. im NT u. in d. ältesten christl. Lit. 1927. Also WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 9ff).
    β. without the art. (s. B-D-F §257, 2; Rob. 761; 795) πνεῦμα ἅγιον (PGM 3, 289; Da 5:12 LXX; PsSol 17:37; AssMos Fgm. b; Just., D. 4, 1 al.; Ath. 24, 1. S. also Da Theod. 4:8, 9, 18 θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον or πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον) Mk 1:8; Lk 1:15, 35, 41, 67; 2:25; 4:1; 11:13; J 20:22 (Cassien, La pentecôte johannique [J 20:19–23] ’39.—See also 1QS 4:20f); Ac 2:4a; 4:8; 7:55; 8:15, 17, 19; 9:17; 10:38; 11:24; 13:9; 19:2ab; Hb 2:4; 6:4; 1 Pt 1:12 v.l.; 1 Cl 2:2; AcPl 6:18; 9:4 (restored after Aa I 110, 11); AcPlCor 2:5.—So oft. in combination w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος ἁγίου Ac 1:2; 4:25; Ro 5:5; 2 Ti 1:14; 1 Cl 8:1 (cp. διὰ πν. αἰωνίου Hb 9:14). διὰ φωνῆς πν. ἁγίου AcPl Ha 11, 6. ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου (Eus., PE 3, 12, 3 of the Egyptians: ἐκ τ. πνεύματος οἴονται συλλαμβάνειν τὸν γῦπα. Here πνεῦμα= ‘wind’; s. Horapollo 1, 11 p. 14f. The same of other birds since Aristot.—On the neut. πνεῦμα as a masc. principle cp. Aristoxenus, Fgm. 13 of the two original principles: πατέρα μὲν φῶς, μητέρα δὲ σκότος) Mt 1:18, 20; IEph 18:2; GJs 14:2; 19:1 (pap). ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ (PsSol 17:37; ApcZeph; Ar. 15, 1) Mt 3:11; Mk 1:8 v.l.; Lk 3:16; J 1:33b; Ac 1:5 (cp. 1QS 3:7f); 11:16; Ro 9:1; 14:17; 15:16; 1 Cor 12:3b; 2 Cor 6:6; 1 Th 1:5; 1 Pt 1:12 (without ἐν v.l.); Jd 20. ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου 2 Pt 1:21. Cp. ἐν δυνάμει πνεύματος ἁγίου Ro 15:13, 19 v.l. (for πνεύματος θεοῦ). μετὰ χαρᾶς πνεύματος ἁγίου 1 Th 1:6. διὰ ἀνακαινώσεως πνεύματος ἁγίου Tit 3:5.
    ⓓ abs.
    α. w. the art. τὸ πνεῦμα. In this connection the art. is perh. used anaphorically at times, w. the second mention of a word (s. B-D-F §252; Rob. 762); perh. Mt 12:31 (looking back to vs. 28 πν. θεοῦ); Mk 1:10, 12 (cp. vs. 8 πν. ἅγιον); Lk 4:1b, 14 (cp. vs. 1a); Ac 2:4b (cp. vs. 4a).—As a rule it is not possible to assume that anaphora is present: Mt 4:1; J 1:32, 33a; 3:6a, 8b (in wordplay), 34; 7:39a; Ac 8:29; 10:19; 11:12, 28; 19:1 D; 20:3 D, 22; 21:4; Ro 8:23 (ἀπαρχή 1bβ; 2), 26a, 27; 12:11; 15:30; 2 Cor 1:22 and 5:5 (KErlemann, ZNW 83, ’92, 202–23, and s. ἀρραβών); 12:18 (τῷ αὐτῷ πν.); Gal 3:2, 5, 14 (ἐπαγγελία 1bβ); Eph 4:3 (gen. of the author); 6:17 (perh. epexegetic gen.); 1 Ti 4:1a; Js 4:5; 1J 3:24; 5:6ab (some mss. add καὶ πνεύματος to the words διʼ ὕδατος κ. αἵματος at the beg. of the verse; this is approved by HvSoden, Moffatt, Vogels, Merk, and w. reservations by CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46, TManson, JTS 48, ’47, 25–33), vs. 8; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 14:13; 22:17; B 19:2, B 7= D 4:10 (s. ἐτοιμάζω b). ἐν τῷ πνεύματι (led) by the Spirit Lk 2:27.—Paul links this Spirit of God, known to every Christian, with Christ as liberating agent in contrast to legal constraint ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμα ἐστιν the Lord means Spirit 2 Cor 3:17a (UHolzmeister, 2 Cor 3:17 Dominus autem Spiritus est 1908; JNisius, Zur Erklärung v. 2 Cor 3:16ff: ZKT 40, 1916, 617–75; JKögel, Ὁ κύριος τὸ πνεῦμά ἐστιν: ASchlatter Festschr. 1922, 35–46; C Guignebert, Congr. d’Hist. du Christ. II 1928, 7–22; EFuchs, Christus u. d. Geist b. Pls ’32; HHughes, ET 45, ’34, 235f; CLattey, Verb. Dom. 20, ’40, 187–89; DGriffiths ET 55, ’43, 81–83; HIngo, Kyrios und Pneuma, ’61 [Paul]; JDunn, JTS 21, ’70, 309–20).
    β. without the art. πνεῦμα B 1:3. κοινωνία πνεύματος Phil 2:1 (κοινωνία 1 and 2). πνεύματι in the Spirit or through the Spirit Gal 3:3; 5:5, 16, 18; 1 Pt 4:6. εἰ ζῶμεν πνεύματι, πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν if we live by the Spirit, let us also walk by the Spirit Gal 5:25. Freq. used w. a prep.: διὰ πνεύματος 1 Pt 1:22 v.l. ἐξ (ὕδατος καὶ) πνεύματος J 3:5. ἐν πνεύματι in, by, through the Spirit Mt 22:43; Eph 2:22; 3:5; 5:18; 6:18; Col 1:8 (ἀγάπη ἐν πνεύματι love called forth by the Spirit); B 9:7. κατὰ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4f; Gal 4:29. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2 (s. ἁγιασμός).—In neg. expressions: οὔπω ἧν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39b. ψυχικοὶ πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες worldly people, who do not have the Spirit Jd 19.—ἓν πνεῦμα one and the same Spirit 1 Cor 12:13; Eph 2:18; 4:4; one (in) Spirit 1 Cor 6:17.
    ⓔ The Spirit is more closely defined by a gen. of thing: τὸ πν. τῆς ἀληθείας (TestJud 20:5) J 14:17; 15:26; 16:13 (in these three places the Spirit of Truth is the Paraclete promised by Jesus upon his departure); 1J 4:6 (opp. τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης, as TestJud 20:1; PsSol 8:14 πλ. πλανήσεως; Just., D. 7, 3 πλάνου καὶ ἀκαθάρτου πνεύματος; cp. 1QS 4:23); τὸ τῆς δόξης πν. 1 Pt 4:14. τὸ πν. τῆς ζωῆς the Spirit of life Ro 8:2. το πν. τῆς πίστεως 2 Cor 4:13. πν. σοφίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεως Eph 1:17 (cp. Just., D. 87, 4). πν. υἱοθεσίας Ro 8:15b (opp. πν. δουλείας vs. 15a). πν. δυνάμεως AcPl Ha 8, 25. πν. δυνάμεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 2 Ti 1:7 (opp. πν. δειλίας). τὸ πν. τῆς χάριτος (s. TestJud 24:2) Hb 10:29 (Zech 12:10); cp. 1 Cl 46:6.
    ⓕ Of Christ ‘it is written’ in Scripture: (ἐγένετο) ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Cor 15:45. The scripture pass. upon which the first part of this verse is based is Gen 2:7, where Wsd 15:11 also substitutes the words πνεῦμα ζωτικόν for πνοὴν ζωῆς (cp. Just., D. 6, 2). On the other hand, s. Philo, Leg. All. 1, 42 and s. the lit. s.v. Ἀδάμ ad loc.
    ⓖ The (divine) Pneuma stands in contrast to everything that characterizes this age or the finite world gener.: οὐ τὸ πν. τοῦ κόσμου ἀλλὰ τὸ πν. τὸ ἐκ τοῦ θεοῦ 1 Cor 2:12; cp. Eph 2:2 and 1 Ti 4:1ab.
    α. in contrast to σάρξ, which is more closely connected w. sin than any other earthly material (Just., D. 135, 6): J 3:6; Ro 8:4–6, 9a, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:17ab; 6:8. Cp. B 10:9. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία κατὰ τοῦ πνεύματος στρατεύεται Pol 5:3.
    β. in contrast to σῶμα (=σάρξ) Ro 8:10 and to σάρξ (=σῶμα, as many hold) J 6:63a (for τὸ πν. ἐστιν τὸ ζῳοποιοῦν cp. Philo, Op. Mund. 30; Herm. Wr. in Cyrill., C. Jul. I 556c=542, 24 Sc. the pneuma τὰ πάντα ζῳοποιεῖ καὶ τρέφει. S. also f above). Cp. Ro 8:11b.
    γ. in contrast to γράμμα, which is the characteristic quality of God’s older declaration of the divine will in the law: Ro 2:29; 7:6; 2 Cor 3:6ab, 8 (cp. vs. 7).
    δ. in contrast to the wisdom of humans 1 Cor 2:13.
    ⑥ the Spirit of God as exhibited in the character or activity of God’s people or selected agents, Spirit, spirit (s. HPreisker, Geist u. Leben ’33).
    ⓐ πνεῦμα is accompanied by another noun, which characterizes the working of the Spirit more definitely: πνεῦμα καὶ δύναμις spirit and power Lk 1:17; 1 Cor 2:4. Cp. Ac 10:38; 1 Th 1:5. πνεῦμα καὶ ζωή J 6:63b. πνεῦμα κ. σοφία Ac 6:3; cp. vs. 10 (cp. TestReub 2:6 πνεῦμα λαλίας). πίστις κ. πνεῦμα ἅγιον 6:5 (cp. Just., D. 135, 6). χαρὰ καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγ. 13:52.
    ⓑ Unless frustrated by humans in their natural condition, the Spirit of God produces a spiritual type of conduct Gal 5:16, 25 and produces the καρπὸς τοῦ πνεύματος vs. 22 (s. Vögtle under πλεονεξία).
    ⓒ The Spirit inspires certain people of God B 12:2; B 13:5, above all, in their capacity as proclaimers of a divine revelation (Strabo 9, 3, 5 the πνεῦμα ἐνθουσιαστικόν, that inspired the Pythia; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; 33, 5 of the divine πν. that impels prophets and poets to express themselves; schol. on Pla. 856e of a μάντις: ἄνωθεν λαμβάνειν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ πληροῦσθαι τοῦ θεοῦ; Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 4 [=Fgm. 2, 4 p. 136 Holladay] τὸ θεῖον πν., καθʼ ὸ̔ καὶ προφήτης ἀνακεκήρυκται ‘[Moses possessed] the Divine Spirit with the result that he was proclaimed a prophet’; AscIs 1:7 τὸ πν. τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ἐμοί; AssMos Fgm. f εἶδεν πνεύματι ἐπαρθείς; Just., A I, 38, 1 al.; Ath. 10, 3 τὸ προφητικὸν πν. Cp. Marinus, Vi. Procli 23 of Proclus: οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ θείας ἐπινοίας … διαλέγεσθαι; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 28, 23). προφητεία came into being only as ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἁγίου φερόμενοι ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 2 Pt 1:21; cp. Ac 15:29 v.l.; cp. 1 Cl 8:1. David Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; cp. Ac 1:16; 4:25. Isaiah Ac 28:25. Moses B 10:2, B 9; the Spirit was also active in giving the tables of the law to Moses 14:2. Christ himself spoke in the OT διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου 1 Cl 22:1. The ἱεραὶ γραφαί are called αἱ διὰ τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἁγίου 45:2.—The Christian prophet Agabus also ἐσήμαινεν διὰ τοῦ πν. Ac 11:28; cp. Ac 21:11. Likew. Ign. IPhld 7:2. In general the Spirit reveals the most profound secrets to those who believe 1 Cor 2:10ab.—1 Cl claims to be written διὰ τοῦ ἁγ. πν. 63:2. On Ac 19:21 s. 3b.
    ⓓ The Spirit of God, being one, shows the variety and richness of its life in the different kinds of spiritual gifts which are granted to certain Christians 1 Cor 12:4, 7, 11; cp. vs. 13ab.—Vss. 8–10 enumerate the individual gifts of the Spirit, using various prepositions: διὰ τοὺ πν. vs. 8a; κατὰ τὸ πν. vs. 8b; ἐν τῷ πν. vs. 9ab. τὸ πν. μὴ σβέννυτε do not quench the Spirit 1 Th 5:19 refers to the gift of prophecy, acc. to vs. 20.—The use of the pl. πνεύματα is explained in 1 Cor 14:12 by the varied nature of the Spirit’s working; in vs. 32 by the number of persons who possess the prophetic spirit; on the latter s. Rv 22:6 and 19:10.
    ⓔ One special type of spiritual gift is represented by ecstatic speaking. Of those who ‘speak in tongues’ that no earthly person can understand: πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια expresses secret things in a spiritual way 1 Cor 14:2. Cp. vss. 14–16 and s. νοῦς 1b. τὸ πνεῦμα ὑπερεντυγχάνει στεναγμοῖς ἀλαλήτοις the Spirit pleads in our behalf with groans beyond words Ro 8:26b. Of speech that is ecstatic, but expressed in words that can be understood λαλεῖν ἐν πνεύματι D 11:7, 8; cp. vs. 9 (on the subject-matter 1 Cor 12:3; Jos., Ant. 4, 118f; TestJob 43:2 ἀναλαβὼν Ἐλιφᾶς πν. εἶπεν ὕμνον). Of the state of mind of the seer of the Apocalypse: ἐν πνεύματι Rv 17:3; 21:10; γενέσθαι ἐν πν. 1:10; 4:2 (s. γίνομαι 5c, ἐν 4c and EMoering, StKr 92, 1920, 148–54; RJeske, NTS 31, ’85, 452–66); AcPl Ha 6, 27. On the Spirit at Pentecost Ac 2:4 s. KLake: Beginn. I 5, ’33, 111–21. κατασταλέντος τοῦ πν. τοῦ ἐν Μύρτῃ when the Spirit (of prophecy) that was in Myrta ceased speaking AcPl Ha 7, 9.
    ⓕ The Spirit leads and directs Christian missionaries in their journeys (Aelian, NA 11, 16 the young women are led blindfolded to the cave of the holy serpent; they are guided by a πνεῦμα θεῖον) Ac 16:6, 7 (by dreams, among other methods; cp. vs. 9f and s. Marinus, Vi. Procli 27: Proclus ἔφασκεν προθυμηθῆναι μὲν πολλάκις γράψαι, κωλυθῆναι δὲ ἐναργῶς ἔκ τινων ἐνυπνίων). In Ac 16:6–7 τὸ ἅγιον πν. and τὸ πν. Ἰησοῦ are distinguished.
    ⑦ an activating spirit that is not fr. God, spirit: πν. ἔτερον a different (kind of) spirit 2 Cor 11:4. Cp. 2 Th 2:2; 1J 4:1–3. Because there are persons activated by such spirits, it is necessary to test the var. kinds of spirits (the same problem Artem. 3, 20 περὶ διαφορᾶς μάντεων, οἷς δεῖ προσέχειν καὶ οἷς μή) 1 Cor 12:10; 1J 4:1b. ὁ διάβολος πληροῖ αὐτὸν αὐτοῦ πν. Hm 11:3. Also οὐκ οἴδατε ποίου πνεύματός ἐστε Lk 9:55 v.l. distinguishes betw. the spirit shown by Jesus’ disciples, and another kind of spirit.—Even more rarely a spirit divinely given that is not God’s own; so (in a quot. fr. Is 29:10) a πνεῦμα κατανύξεως Ro 11:8.
    ⑧ an independent transcendent personality, the Spirit, which appears in formulas that became more and more fixed and distinct (cp. Ath. 12, 2; Hippol., Ref. 7, 26, 2.—Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 12 θεόν, υἱόν πατρός, πνεῦμα ἐκ πατρὸς ἐκπορευόμενον ἓν ἐκ τριῶν καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς τρία, ταῦτα νόμιζε Ζῆνα, τόνδʼ ἡγοῦ θεόν=‘God, son of the father, spirit proceeding from the father, one from three and three from one, consider these as Zeus, think of this one as God’. The entire context bears a Christian impress.—As Aion in gnostic speculation Iren. 1, 2, 5 [Harv. I 21, 2]): βαπτίζοντες αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος Mt 28:19 (on the text s. βαπτίζω 2c; on the subject-matter GWalther, Die Entstehung des Taufsymbols aus dem Taufritus: StKr 95, 1924, 256ff); D 7:1, 3. Cp. 2 Cor 13:13; 1 Cl 58:2; IEph 9:1; IMg 13:1b, 2; MPol 14:3; 22:1, 3; Epil Mosq 5. On this s. HUsener, Dreiheit: RhM 58, 1903, 1ff; 161ff; 321ff; esp. 36ff; EvDobschütz, Zwei-u. dreigliedrige Formeln: JBL 50, ’31, 116–47 (also Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 92–100); Norden, Agn. Th. 228ff; JMainz, Die Bed. der Dreizahl im Judentum 1922; Clemen2 125–28; NSöderblom, Vater, Sohn u. Geist 1909; DNielsen, Der dreieinige Gott I 1922; GKrüger, Das Dogma v. der Dreieinigkeit 1905, 46ff; AHarnack, Entstehung u. Entwicklung der Kirchenverfassung 1910, 187ff; JHaussleiter, Trinitarischer Glaube u. Christusbekenntnis in der alten Kirche: BFCT XXV 4, 1920; JLebreton, Histoire du dogme de la Trinité I: Les origines6 1927; RBlümel, Pls u. d. dreieinige Gott 1929.—On the whole word FRüsche, D. Seelenpneuma ’33; HLeisegang, Der Hl. Geist I 1, 1919; EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 486–95; PVolz, Der Geist Gottes u. d. verwandten Erscheinungen im AT 1910; JHehn, Zum Problem des Geistes im alten Orient u. im AT: ZAW n.s. 2, 1925, 210–25; SLinder, Studier till Gamla Testamentets föreställningar om anden 1926; AMarmorstein, Der Hl. Geist in der rabb. Legende: ARW 28, 1930, 286–303; NSnaith, The Distinctive Ideas of the OT ’46, 229–37; FDillistone, Bibl. Doctrine of the Holy Spirit: Theology Today 3, ’46/47, 486–97; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 341–46; ESchweizer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 482–508; DLys, Rûach, Le Souffle dans l’AT, ’62; DHill, Gk. Words and Hebr. Mngs. ’67, 202–93.—HGunkel, Die Wirkungen des Hl. Geistes2 1899; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen des Geistes u. der Geister im nachap. Zeitalter 1899; EWinstanley, The Spirit in the NT 1908; HSwete, The Holy Spirit in the NT 1909, The Holy Spirit in the Ancient Church 1912; EScott, The Spirit in the NT 1923; FBüchsel, Der Geist Gottes im NT 1926; EvDobschütz, Der Geistbesitz des Christen im Urchristentum: Monatsschr. für Pastoral-theol. 20, 1924, 228ff; FBadcock, ‘The Spirit’ and Spirit in the NT: ET 45, ’34, 218–21; RBultmann, Theologie des NT ’48, 151–62 (Eng. tr. KGrobel, ’51, I 153–64); ESchweizer, Geist u. Gemeinde im NT ’52, Int 6, ’52, 259–78.—WTosetti, Der Hl. Geist als göttliche Pers. in den Evangelien 1918; HLeisegang, Pneuma Hagion. Der Ursprung des Geistbegriffs der Syn. Ev. aus der griech. Mystik 1922; AFrövig, Das Sendungsbewusstsein Jesu u. der Geist 1924; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist nach Syn. Überl.: Studies in Early Christianity, presented to FCPorter and BWBacon 1928, 209–36; FSynge, The Holy Spirit in the Gospels and Acts: CQR 120, ’35, 205–17; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit and the Gospel Trad. ’47.—ESokolowski, Die Begriffe Geist u. Leben bei Pls 1903; KDeissner, Auferstehungshoffnung u. Pneumagedanke bei Pls 1912; GVos, The Eschatological Aspect of the Pauline Conception of the Spirit: Bibl. and Theol. Studies by the Faculty of Princeton Theol. Sem. 1912, 209–59; HBertrams, Das Wesen des Geistes nach d. Anschauung des Ap. Pls 1913; WReinhard, Das Wirken des Hl. Geistes im Menschen nach den Briefen des Ap. Pls 1918; HHoyle, The Holy Spirit in St. Paul 1928; PGächter, Z. Pneumabegriff des hl. Pls: ZKT 53, 1929, 345–408; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik des Ap. Pls 1930, 159–74 al. [Mysticism of Paul the Apostle, tr. WMontgomery ’31, 160–76 al.]; E-BAllo, RB 43, ’34, 321–46 [1 Cor]; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. after Ro 8:11; Synge [s. above], CQR 119, ’35, 79–93 [Pauline epp.]; NWaaning, Onderzoek naar het gebruik van πνεῦμα bij Pls, diss. Amsterd. ’39; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 167–200.—HvBaer, Der Hl. Geist in den Lukasschriften 1926; MGoguel, La Notion joh. de l’Esprit 1902; JSimpson, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: Exp., 9th ser., 4, 1925, 292–99; HWindisch, Jes. u. d. Geist im J.: Amicitiae Corolla (RHarris Festschr.) ’33, 303–18; WLofthouse, The Holy Spirit in Ac and J: ET 52, ’40/41, 334–36; CBarrett, The Holy Spirit in the Fourth Gospel: JTS 1 n.s., ’50, 1–15; FCrump, Pneuma in the Gospels, diss. Catholic Univ. of America, ’54; GLampe, Studies in the Gospels (RHLightfoot memorial vol.) ’55, 159–200; NHamilton, The Holy Spirit and Eschatology in Paul, ’57; WDavies, Paul and the Dead Sea Scrolls, Flesh and Spirit: The Scrolls and the NT, ed. KStendahl, ’57, 157–82.—GJohnston, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Holy Spirit’ in the Qumran Lit.: NT Sidelights (ACPurdy Festschr.) ’60, 27–42; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT, RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; HBraun, Qumran und d. NT II, ’66, 150–64; DHill, Greek Words and Hebrew Meanings, ’67, 202–93; WBieder, Pneumatolog. Aspekte im Hb, OCullmann Festschr. ’72, 251–59; KEasley, The Pauline Usage of πνεύματι as a Reference to the Spirit of God: JETS 27, ’84, 299–313 (statistics).—B. 260; 1087. Pauly-W. XIV 387–412. BHHW I 534–37. Schmidt, Syn. II 218–50. New Docs 4, 38f. DELG s.v. πνέω. M-M. Dict. de la Bible XI 126–398. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πνεῦμα

  • 20 ἐν

    ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.
    ① marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)
    ⓐ of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.
    ⓑ on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.
    ⓒ within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.2] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.
    ⓓ among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.
    ⓔ before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).
    ⓕ esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.
    ② marker of a state or condition, in
    ⓐ of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.
    ⓑ of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.
    ③ marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.
    ④ marker of close association within a limit, in
    ⓐ fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.
    ⓑ of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.
    ⓒ esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls2 ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls2 ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.
    ⑤ marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).
    ⓐ it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’
    α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).
    β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.
    ⓑ it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl2). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).
    ⑥ marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG2 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).
    ⑦ marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.
    ⑧ marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.
    ⑨ marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)
    ⓐ gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.
    ⓑ w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.
    ⑩ marker of a period of time, in, while, when
    ⓐ indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.
    ⓑ point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.
    ⓒ to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.
    ⑪ marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.
    ⑫ marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐν

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Yaqub Beg — Muhammad Yaqub Beg, from the 1898 book by N.Veselovsky Born 1820 Pskent, Khanate of Kokand Died May 30, 1877( …   Wikipedia

  • The Amazing Race — sometimes referred to as TAR, is a reality television game show in which teams of two people (with one exception), who have some form of a preexisting personal relationship, race around the world in competition with other teams. Contestants stri …   Wikipedia

  • Skeletor — Infobox He Man/She Ra Character Title=Skeletor Alliance=#B22222 Name=Skeletor Secret=Keldor Status=Alive Affiliation=Snake Mountain, Hordak, Horde Prime, King Hiss, Flogg Family=King Randor, She Ra, He Man Powers=Various mystical powers,… …   Wikipedia

  • Jack the Ripper — Infobox Serial Killer name=Jack the Ripper caption= A Suspicious Character, from The Illustrated London News for 13 October 1888 carrying the overall caption, With the Vigilance Committee in the East End . birthname= Unknown alias=Saucy… …   Wikipedia

  • Phage ecology — Bacteriophages (phages), potentially the most numerous organisms on Earth, are the viruses of bacteria (more generally, of prokaryotesThe term prokaryotes is useful to mean the sum of the bacteria and archaeabacteria but otherwise can be… …   Wikipedia

  • Rickrolling — A still photo of the YouTube video of Never Gonna Give You Up , the song played when viewers are Rickrolled. Rickrolling is an Internet meme …   Wikipedia

  • Russia — /rush euh/, n. 1. Also called Russian Empire. Russian, Rossiya. a former empire in E Europe and N and W Asia: overthrown by the Russian Revolution 1917. Cap.: St. Petersburg (1703 1917). 2. See Union of Soviet Socialist Republics. 3. See Russian… …   Universalium

  • mathematics — /math euh mat iks/, n. 1. (used with a sing. v.) the systematic treatment of magnitude, relationships between figures and forms, and relations between quantities expressed symbolically. 2. (used with a sing. or pl. v.) mathematical procedures,… …   Universalium

  • Muhammad Zia-ul-Haq — General Muhammad Zia ul Haq Urdu:محمد ضياءالحق General Zia ul Haq (on right), PA 6th President of Pakistan …   Wikipedia

  • Glossary of cue sports terms — The following is a glossary of traditional English language terms used in the three overarching cue sports disciplines: carom (or carambole) billiards referring to the various carom games played on a billiard table without pockets; pool (pocket… …   Wikipedia

  • The Staunton-Morphy controversy — concerns the failure of negotiations in 1858 for a chess match between Howard Staunton and Paul Morphy and later interpretations of the actions of the two players. The details of the events are not universally agreed, and accounts and… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»